Owner`s Manual and Maintenance Information

Owner`s Manual and Maintenance Information
2018 OWNER’S MANUAL
AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Owner’s Manual Supplement
The information contained within this supplement revises the “Towing
load/specification” information in the “Technical and consumer information”
section of the 2018 INFINITI QX60 Owner’s Manual.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
U.S. and Canada
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this
manual are for general reference only. The
safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You
must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed
the published maximum towing capacity or
the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result
in an accident causing serious injury or
property damage.
Maximum Towing
Capacity*1
Maximum Tongue Load
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg)
500 lbs. (226 kg)
10,000 lbs. (4,536 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated
assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional
passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s
maximum towing capacity.
Read carefully and keep in vehicle.
Printing: August 2017
Publication No. SU18EA 0L50U0
FOREWORD
An INFINITI represents a new way of thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, refined aesthetic
sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.
The result is a different notion of luxury and
beauty. The car itself is important, but so is
the sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes
in its driver, and the sense of satisfaction you
feel with the INFINITI — from the way it looks
and drives to the high level of retailer service.
To ensure that you enjoy an INFINITI to the
fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains all of the
features, controls and performance characteristics of an INFINITI; it also provides important instructions and safety information.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet is
included in your Owner’s literature portfolio. The “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual explains details about
maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you take your
vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The Warranty Information Booklet contents provide
complete information about all warranties
covering this vehicle, the requirements to
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
keep the warranties in effect as well as the
INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.
Additionally, a separate Customer Care and
Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain
how to resolve any concerns you may have
with your vehicle, as well as clarify your
rights under your state’s lemon law.
In addition to factory-installed options, your
vehicle may also be equipped with additional
accessories installed prior to delivery. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
It is important that you familiarize yourself
with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and
instructions concerning proper use of such
accessories prior to operating the vehicle
and/or accessory. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for details concerning the particular accessories with which
your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help
ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you
and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
∙ ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive
models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for offroad use, failure to operate all-wheel drive
models correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident. For additional information,
refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car
because it has a higher center of gravity
for off-road use. As with other vehicles
with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or an accident.
For additional information, refer to “Onpavement and off-road driving
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance,
safety, emissions or durability and may
even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not
be covered under INFINITI warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the
port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine
reprogramming,
may
cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use of
any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by INFINITI. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model.
Features and equipment in your vehicle may
vary depending on model, trim level, options
selected, order, date of production, region or
availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not
included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the
time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right
to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice
and without obligation. From time to time,
INFINITI may update or revise this manual to
provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by INFINITI to
ensure you have access to accurate and upto-date information regarding your vehicle.
Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals
and any updates can also be found in the
Owner section of the INFINITI website at
https://owners.infinitiusa.com/owners/
navigation/manualsandGuides. If you have
questions concerning any information in your
Owner’s Manual, contact INFINITI Consumer Affairs. See the INFINITI CUSTOMER
CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s
Manual for contact information.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed precisely.
APD1005
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures
must be followed carefully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the
front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose
you to chemicals including engine exhaust,
carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,
may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply. For
additional
information,
refer
to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
© 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form,
or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd.
INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
INFINITI CARES . . .
Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide INFINITI directly
with comments or questions, please contact
our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-662-6200
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
You can write to INFINITI with the information on the left at:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
For U.S. customers
INFINITI Division
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
[email protected]
– Vehicle identification number (on dash
panel)
– Date of purchase
For Canadian customers
1-800-361-4792
– Current odometer reading
– Your INFINITI retailer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
For Canadian customers
INFINITI Division
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
[email protected] com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.infinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Do-it-yourself
8
Maintenance and schedules
9
Technical and consumer information
10
Index
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.
Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-2)
Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-12)
5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-17,
1-50)
6. Supplemental air bags (P.1-50)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P.1-50)
8. Front seats (P. 1-2)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) (P. 1-28)
11. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor
(located on bottom of seatback)
(P. 1-28)
12. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of seatback) (P. 1-28)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2420
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
Engine hood (P. 3-23)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-35)
Wiper blades (P. 8-17)
3. Windshield (P. 8-17)
4. Power windows (P. 2-64)
5. Door locks (P. 3-4)
INFINITI Intelligent Key (P. 3-7)
Remote engine start (if so equipped)
(P. 3-20)
Keys (P. 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-36)
Side camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-28)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-28)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-40)
Daytime running lights system
(P. 2-40)
9. Fog light switch (P. 2-40)
10. Sonar sensors (P. 5-140)
11. Front camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2497
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-35)
Liftgate release (P. 3-23)
Rearview camera (P.4-11)
Sonar sensors (if so equipped)
(P. 5-140)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-24)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-30)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-30)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2418
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Power moonroof (P. 2-67, 2-68)
Panoramic sunshade (if so equipped)
(P. 2-68)
Console box (P. 2-57)
Map lights (P. 2-72)
Sun visors (P. 3-34)
Glove box (P. 2-57)
Cup holders (P. 2-57)
Luggage hooks (P. 2-57)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2419
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
LII2544
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Vent (P. 4-33)
Headlight/fog light/turn signal
switch (P. 2-45)
3.
Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-40)
4.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-16)
5.
Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-50)
Horn (P. 2-46)
6.
Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)
system switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-59)
7.
Trip reset switch (P. 2-4)
8.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-35)
Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-35)
9.
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch (P. 2-39)
10. Center display*
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
11. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-34)
12. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-57)
13. Glove box (P. 2-59)
14. Center multi-function control
buttons*
15. Power outlet (P. 2-54)
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Shift lever (P. 5-19)
Audio system controls*
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-50)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-13)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-76)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-78)
Dynamic Driver Assistance switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-98)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-33)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
Steering wheel switch for audio
control*
25. Hood release (P. 3-23)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-51)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
Warning Systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-50)
Power inverter switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-53)
Liftgate release switch (P. 3-23)
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)
26. Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-17)
*: Refer to the separate Infiniti InTouchTM
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ35DD engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-9)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
Drive belt location (P. 8-15)
Fuse box (P. 8-20)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)
Air cleaner (P. 8-16)
Fuse box (P. 8-20)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-20)
Battery (P. 8-12)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-11)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI3131
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
or
Name
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
Brake warning
light
Page
Warning
light
2-9
2-9
or
Charge warning
light
2-10
Forward Emergency Braking
(FEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-10
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-10
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Master warning
light
2-12
Front passenger
air bag status light
2-13
Power steering
warning light
2-12
2-13
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-12
High beam assist
indicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)
2-13
High beam indicator light (blue)
2-13
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Page
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
2-14
Name
2-13
Security indicator
light
2-14
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator light
2-14
Front fog light indicator light
(green)
2-13
Side light and
headlight indicator
light (green)
Slip indicator light
2-15
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-15
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC)
OFF indicator light
2-15
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2nd row bench seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Armrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Removable (without Dual Head
Restraint/Headrest DVD System only) . . . . . . . .1-14
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Folding head restraint/headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Pre-crash seat belts with comfort
function (front seats) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 1-20
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . .1-21
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
SEATS
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause
a significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
ARS1152
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on
seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could
become involved in serious accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of
the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined any
more than needed for comfort. Seat belts
are most effective when the passenger
sits well back and straight up in the seat.
If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is
increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure
not to contact any moving parts to avoid
possible injuries and/or damage.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different sizes
for added comfort and to help obtain proper
seat belt fit. For additional information, refer
to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
LRS2662
FRONT POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Operating tips
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
∙ The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch.
Forward and backward
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for
a long period of time when the engine is
off. This will discharge the battery.
Reclining
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
LRS2636
Driver’s seat
LRS2909
Passenger’s seat
LRS2132
Manual (if so equipped)
Seat lifter
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle (if so equipped) and height of the seat
cushion.
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Move
the lever as shown (manual) or push the
switch as shown (power) to adjust the seat
lumbar area.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever
2 and lean back. To bring the seatback for䊊
2 up and lean your body
ward, pull the lever 䊊
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
LRS2270
Power (if so equipped)
LRS2143
Outboard seats
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Forward and backward
1 up and hold it
Pull the center of the bar 䊊
while you slide the seat forward or backward
to the desired position. Release the bar to
lock the seat in position.
The recline feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Multi-mode
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
WARNING
When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat and seatback
are locked properly.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot
or bump your head when operating the
walk-in seat.
LRS2142
One touch walk-in function
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside
the vehicle by using the seatback release lever located on the upper outboard side of the
seatback on the 2nd row bench seat. If a child
safety seat is installed on the passenger’s side
of the 2nd row seat, the 3rd row can be
accessed without removing the child safety
seat.
∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped
up.
∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat
to pinch, hit any part of your body or
other people when operating the 2nd row
seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of
all objects before moving the seat.
To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift up on the seatback lever located on
the upper outboard side of the seatback on
the 2nd row bench seat. This will release the
back of the seat and fold up the seat cushion.
This will also release the seat tracks so you
will be able to slide the seat forward or backward.
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
3rd row.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
To return the seat to a locked position, push
the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and tracks are locked. Push the seat
cushion down.
Child seat access mode
The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat can
be slid forward for easy entry or exit from the
3rd row bench seat without a child safety
seat being removed.
To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift up on the seatback lever located on
the upper outboard side of the seatback on
the 2nd row bench seat. This will release the
seatback. Then tilt the seat and release the
tracks so you will be able to slide the seat
forward or backward.
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
rear seats.
To return the seat to a locked position, push
the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked.
WARNING
∙ Do not leave a child in the child safety
seat when operating the child seat access
mode.
∙ When returning the seat to its original
position, confirm that the seat and seatback are locked properly.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot
or bump your head when operating the
walk-in seat.
To return the seat to a locked position, push
the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked.
WARNING
When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat and seatback
are locked properly.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or
bump your head when operating the
walk-in seat.
∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped
up.
∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat
to pinch, hit any part of your body or
other people when operating the 2nd row
seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of
all objects before moving the seat.
Exiting the 3rd row
To exit the 3rd row from either seating position, lift the upper seatback release lever to
the uppermost position. This will release the
back of the seat, then fold the seat cushion
up and release the tracks.
Slide the entire seat forward.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
The recline feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
LRS2913
3RD ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch
located on the outside corner of each seatback. Lean back until the desired angle is
obtained.
To bring the seatback forward again, pull up
on the latch and pull the seatback upright
until the desired angle is obtained.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2924
ARMRESTS
The 2nd row bench seat comes equipped
with an armrest. Pull the armrest down as
shown.
FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are in
the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to use
the same seat belt.
∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or any
luggage is on the rear seats.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If
they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet to
get caught or pinched in the seat.
∙ Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an
accident. Always replace and adjust them
properly if they have been removed for
any reason.
∙ If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
LRS2144
Folding the 2nd row bench seat
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling:
1. Make
sure
that
the
head
restraints/headrests are lowered. To remove the head restraints/headrests,
push and hold the lock knob while moving the head restraints/headrests in an
upward direction. Store the head
restraints/headrests properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat
belt hooks found on the sides of the
vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
C to raise each seat1. Use the pull straps 䊊
back. Pull back until the seatback latches
into position. Make sure to properly
raise each seatback to an upright and
secured position.
3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of
the outboard seats to fold the seatbacks
flat.
4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place.
2. Do not use the pull strap to return the
head restraint/headrest to the upright
position. Pull back on the head
restraint/headrest until it latches in the
upright position.
LRS2964
3rd row manual folding seats
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum
cargo capacity:
A to release the head
1. Pull the strap 䊊
restraint/headrest forward.
2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat
D found on the sides of the
belt hooks 䊊
cargo area.
B located in the
3. Pull up on the latch 䊊
upper corner of each seatback and lower
the seatback forward over the seat base.
Manual operation to return the 3rd row seats
to a seating position (if so equipped):
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
cally. Check if there are any obstacles caught
that prevent seats from returning to the
folded position. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the beep still
sounds.
CAUTION
When operating the 3rd row power seatback return, make sure that the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P
(Park) position.
WARNING
LRS2623
Power operation to return the 3rd row seats
to a seating position (if so equipped):
1. Push and hold the corresponding switch
E located on the right and left side in the
䊊
cargo area.
A beep sounds once and the seatback will be
returned automatically.
A beep sounds twice when the seatback is
fully returned to the seating position.
If the control unit detects any obstacle or
malfunctions while in the power operation, a
beep sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback
will return to the folded position automati-
∙ Do not fold down the 3rd row seats when
occupants are in the 3rd row seat area or
any luggage is on the 3rd row seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet to
get caught or pinched in the seat.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
∙ When the seat is returned to the normal
seating
position,
the
head
restraints/headrests must be returned
to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the 3rd row seats when they
are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement the
other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone else
uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the
head restraint/headrest stalks or remove
the head restraint/headrest. Do not use
the seat if the head restraint/headrest has
been
removed.
If
the
head
restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall
and
properly
adjust
the
head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision.
∙ The
non-adjustable
head
restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat
frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
LRS2308
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if
applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of
your ear is approximately level with
the
center
of
the
head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.
LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
LRS2302
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:
2. Multiple notches
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
3. Lock knob
2. Single notch
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
4. Stalks
3. Lock knob
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
4. Stalks
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in
the vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
LRS2302
REMOVABLE (without Dual Head
Restraint/Headrest DVD System
only)
CAUTION
Do not remove head restraint/headrest
from vehicles equipped with Dual Head
Restraint/Headrest DVD System. Removal
may damage the system wiring.
LRS2303
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks
with the holes in the seat. Make sure that
the head restraint/headrest is facing the
correct direction. The stalk with the
1 must be installed in
notch (notches) 䊊
2 .
the hole with the lock knob 䊊
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly
adjust
the
head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0134
LRS2351
LRS2305
ADJUST
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Raise
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the
notch before riding in that designated seating
position.
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the
notch before riding in that designated seating
position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal
seating
position,
the
head
restraint/headrest must be returned to the
upright position to properly protect vehicle
occupants.
LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the
notch before riding in that designated seating
position.
LRS2307
FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST
To fold the head restraint/headrest, pull the
strap located on the rear of the head
restraint/headrest.
If the head restraint/headrest has been
folded, make sure that it is returned to the
upright position.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knobs are engaged in the
notches before riding in that designated
seating position.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SEAT BELTS
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor,
your chances of being injured or killed in a
collision and/or the severity of injury may be
greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle
up every time you drive, even if your seating
position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories specify that seat belts be worn at
all times when a vehicle is being driven.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
SSS0134
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Children should be in the rear seats and in
an appropriate restraint.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0016
WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted
to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce
the effectiveness of the entire restraint
system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is not
worn properly.
∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to use
the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
SSS0014
WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never
put the belt behind your back, under your
arm or across your neck. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in an
accident.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON
with all doors closed and all seat belts
fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in
the system. Have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
∙ Once a seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show no
damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and
replacement recommendations. The child
restraints should be replaced if they are
damaged.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
PREGNANT WOMEN
INFINITI recommends that pregnant women
use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn
snug and always position the lap belt as low
as possible around the hips, not the waist.
Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder
and across your chest. Never run the
lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area.
Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats
are equipped with a seat belt warning light.
The warning light, located on the instrument
panel, will show the status of the driver and
passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light
will not light up if the seat is not occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
∙ Activation of the Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system (if so equipped). For additional
information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ In the event of certain types of rollover
collisions.
The pre-crash seat belt will not be active
when:
INFINITI recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
∙ the seat belt is not fastened.
PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH
COMFORT FUNCTION (front
seats) (if so equipped)
∙ the vehicle speed is under 30 km/h
(19 mph) during sudden steering maneuvers.
The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat belt
with a motor to help restrain front seat occupants. This helps reduce the risk of injury in a
collision.
The motor retracts the seat belt under the
following emergency conditions:
∙ During emergency braking.
∙ During sudden steering maneuvers.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ the vehicle speed is under 15 km/h
(10 mph) during emergency braking.
The pre-crash seat belt will not be active
when the brake pedal is not depressed except
when sudden steering maneuvers occur and
the Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system (if so equipped)
activates.
The motor also retracts the seat belt when
the seat belt is fastened or unfastened. When
the seat belt is fastened, the motor tightens
the seat belt for a snug fit. When the seat belt
is unfastened, the motor retracts the seat
belt. If the seat belt is not fully retracted, the
motor retracts the seat belt when the door is
opened.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit
upright and well back.
∙ Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Children should be in the rear seats and in
an appropriate restraint.
If the motor cannot retract the seat belt when
the seat belt is fastened or unfastened, it may
indicate the pre-crash seat belt system has a
malfunction. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer to check and repair the
system.
When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly in
a short period of time, the motor may not be
able to retract the seat belt. After 8 minutes,
the motor reactivates and retracts the seat
belt. If the seat belt still cannot be retracted
by the motor, the pre-crash seat belt system
has a malfunction. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer to check and
repair the system.
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against
your body. In an accident, you could be
thrown into it and receive neck or other
serious injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious internal
injuries.
∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes tight.
This can occur even if the vehicle is
parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release
the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release
the child by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors)
to release the seat belt.
∙ For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be
upright. Always sit well back and upright
in the seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
LRS2662
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.
LRS2674
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the seat belt to
move and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
gers some freedom of movement in the seat.
The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle
slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the seat
belt tongue is detached from the buckle and
fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the
ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts.
For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
C . Be
retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
sure the shoulder belt is routed over your
shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two
modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend
and retract to allow the driver and passen-
The ALR mode should be used only for child
restraint installation. During normal seat
belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
It can also change the operation of the front
passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
1 . The seat belt automatically
the buckle 䊊
retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
belt movement by two separate methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor.
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows.
shoulder. Release the adjustment button to
lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure
it is securely fixed in position.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service, or to learn more about seat belt
operation.
SSS0896
䊊
A
Shoulder belt height adjust button
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front and 2nd row outboard seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions
on seat belt usage” in this section.
To adjust, push the button and then move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired position
so that the belt passes over the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off of your
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of injury
in an accident.
∙ The shoulder belt should rest on the
middle of the shoulder. It must not rest
against the neck.
∙ Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in
any way.
∙ Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is
secured by trying to move the shoulder
belt anchor up and down after
adjustment.
Seat belt extenders are available for the:
∙ Driver and front passenger seating position
∙ 2nd and 3rd row seating position
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
LRS2952
3rd row shown; 2nd row similar
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder
belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available
for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be
used for either the driver or front passenger
seating position.
∙ Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should be
used with INFINITI seat belts.
∙ Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender.
Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an
accident.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the
seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide
of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts
may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If loose
parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire
seat belt assembly should be replaced.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision or a
sudden stop.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are equipped
with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes
wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR
mode activated, the child can be seriously
injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if the
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release
the child by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available
from many other sources, including doctors,
teachers, government traffic safety offices,
and community organizations. Every child is
different, so be sure to learn the best way to
transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraint
∙ Forward-facing child restraint
∙ Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and
less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in
rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing
child restraints are available for children who
outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are
at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to
help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a
child who can no longer use a forward-facing
child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may come
too close to the face or neck. The lap belt
may not fit over their small hip bones. In an
accident, an improperly fitting seat belt
could cause serious or fatal injury. Always
use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle
by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor
and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the
vehicle seat belt. For additional information,
refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and
children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system
(air bag system) for the front passenger. For
additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
INFINITI recommends that infants be placed
in child restraints that comply with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should
choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle
and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rearfacing child restraint as long as possible up to
the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or
weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint
and are at least 1 year old should be secured
in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for minimum and maximum weight and
height recommendations. INFINITI recommends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose
a child restraint that fits your vehicle and
always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they reach
the maximum height or weight limit allowed
by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing
child restraint, INFINITI recommends that
the child be placed in a commercially available
booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For
a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt
is properly positioned across the chest and
the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The
shoulder belt should not cross the neck or
face and should not fall off the shoulder. The
lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips
or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions that
have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
front edge of the seat with feet flat on
the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips and
shoulder belt across mid-chest and
shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
A booster seat should be used until the child
can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching?
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
CHILD RESTRAINTS
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state
regulations to confirm your child is using the
correct restraint system before traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or killed
in a sudden stop or collision.
LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions,
the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1098
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a
collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
WRS0256
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation
of child restraints could result in serious
injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all of
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
– INFINITI recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat. If you must
install a forward-facing child restraint
in the front seat, refer to “Forwardfacing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this section.
– Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child
restraint must only be used in the rear
seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle. Some
child restraints may not fit properly in
your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible
after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always be
placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface
and buckles before placing a child in the
child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments
that can be connected to these anchors. For
additional information, refer to “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints
for infants and children of various sizes.
When selecting any child restraint, keep the
following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg),
you may use either the LATCH anchors
or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top
tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor
point on the vehicle.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2922
LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system
compatible child restraints. This system may
also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX
compatible system. With this system, you do
not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure
the child restraint unless the combined
weight of the child and child restraint exceeds
65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of
the child and child restraint is greater than
65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt
(not the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided
to install child restraints in the following positions only:
∙ 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating
positions
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child
restraints could result in serious injury or
death of a child or other passengers in a
sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such as
seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be
secured properly if the lower anchors
are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
LRS2925
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback to
help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
2nd row center position using the
LATCH system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
LRS2930
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments
that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to
use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child
restraint. Check your child restraint for a label
stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This
information may also be in the instructions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child restraint.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the top tether strap
is damaged.
∙ Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorages,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
LRS2553
LRS2916
2nd row bench seat
1
䊊
2
䊊
Top tether strap
Anchor point
3rd row bench seat
1
䊊
2
䊊
Top tether strap
Anchor point
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
locations:
∙ 2nd row bench on the bottom of the
seatback in the seating positions shown.
∙ 3rd row bench on the bottom of the seatback on the passenger side seating position as shown.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
stall the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
REAR-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the
LATCH system:
WARNING
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach
adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using
the damaged anchorages, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to in-
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2932
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.
LRS2933
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and
rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your hand to compress the
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
tightening the webbing of the anchor
attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to
see if the LATCH attachment holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or
try installing by using the vehicle seat
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints
fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be used
in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.
Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle
until you hear and feel the latch engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when
the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
LRS2397
Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the 2nd row seats
using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
LRS2934
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether
strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
LRS2935
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or
a different child restraint.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and
rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress the
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
tightening the webbing of the anchor
attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to
see if the LATCH attachment holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
2nd row bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap
shown.
LRS2553
1
䊊
2
䊊
2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
1
䊊
as
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an2 as shown.
chor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating positions only).
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger
seat:
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach
adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using
the damaged anchorage, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.
1. If you must install a child restraint in the
front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in the
rear-facing direction and, therefore,
must not be used in the front seat.
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint
exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or
a different child restraint.
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle
until you hear and feel the latch engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point (rear seat installation
only). For additional information, refer to
“Installing top tether strap” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the
seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
with your knee to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback while pulling
up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
LRS0865
Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front passhould
senger air bag status light
illuminate. If this light is not illuminated
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section. Move the
child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
2nd row bench seat
WARNING
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap
shown.
LRS2553
1
䊊
2
䊊
2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
1
䊊
as
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an2 as shown.
chor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap
shown.
1
䊊
as
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an2 as shown.
chor point 䊊
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach
adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using
the damaged anchorage, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
The passenger side of the 3rd row bench seat
is the seating position that can use a top
tether strap. First, secure the child restraint
with the seat belt, as applicable.
1. Position the top tether strap
shown.
1
䊊
as
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an2 as shown.
chor point 䊊
LRS2916
1
䊊
2
䊊
3rd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point
3rd row bench seat
WARNING
In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint
with a top tether strap can only be used on
the passenger side seating position. Do not
place in the driver’s side seating position
and attempt to angle the tether strap to
the passenger side seating position.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove
any slack. Make sure the head
restraint/headrest does not contact the
top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach
adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using
the damaged anchorage, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is away from the child’s face and
neck and the lap portion of the belt
does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
LRS2479
A.
Low back booster seat
B.
High back booster seat
LRS0453
LRS0464
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in
mind:
∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or
above the center of the child’s ears. For
example, if a low back booster seat is
chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears. If
the seatback is lower than the center of
the child’s ears, a high back booster seat
should be used.
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the booster
seat and check the various adjustments
to be sure the booster seat is compatible
with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats or
the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child
restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of
this manual before installing a child restraint.
WRS0699
LRS0454
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in
the 2nd or 3rd rows or in the front passenger
seat:
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper booster
seat fit, try another seating position or a
different booster seat.
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced
Air Bag System)
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure
to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat
belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat
belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the top, middle portion
of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow
the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt
with retractor” in this section.
∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
LRS0865
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch
in the ON position. The front passenger
may or may not
air bag status light
illuminate, depending on the size of the
child and the type of booster seat being
used. For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in
certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and front
passenger in certain side-impact collisions.
The side air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side
impact, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for a
short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the driver and front
passenger seat belts and is not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel,
instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in
this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WRS0031
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal
collision. Always wear your seat belts to
help reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.
∙ The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light
is lit. For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front air
bags inflate with great force. Even with
the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, if
you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
sitting sideways or out of position in any
way, you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also receive
serious or fatal injuries from the front air
bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
∙ The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
monitors the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage then inflates the air bags
as needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this
section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel. Placing them inside the steering
wheel rim could increase the risk that
they are injured when the front air bag
inflates.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1133
ARS1041
ARS1042
ARS1043
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your
lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the
illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
ARS1044
ARS1045
ARS1046
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or killed
when the front air bags, side air bags or
curtain air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the
rear seat, if possible.
∙ Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or
kill your child. For additional information,
refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0431
WRS0365
SSS0162
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you
are sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The side
air bag and curtain air bag inflate with
great force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails. Do
not allow anyone sitting in the front
seats or rear outboard seats to extend
their hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the
previous illustrations.
WRS0363
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air
bag inflation.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0159
INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
6. Crash zone sensor
7. Occupant classification system control
unit
8. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor – located on passenger seat
frame)
9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
10. Satellite sensors
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules
LRS2534
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat
to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing
against the rear of the seatback, such as a
child restraint installed in the rear seat or
an object stored on the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
between the seat cushion and the center
console or between the seat cushion and
the door.
∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not
position the front passenger seat so the
child restraint contacts the instrument
panel. If the child restraint does contact
the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision.
Also the front passenger air bag status
light may not illuminate. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with the
front passenger air bag status light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant
classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a retailer
that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating
positions.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Do not position the front passenger seat
so it contacts the rear seat. If the front
seat does contact the rear seat, the air
bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate
and the supplemental air bag warning
light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual still apply and must
be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag
is located in the center of the steering wheel.
The front passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag is mounted in the dashboard
above the glove box. The front air bags are
designed to inflate in higher severity frontal
collisions, although they may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are similar
to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag
system operation.
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensor and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage for the driver. For the front
passenger, the occupant classification sensor
is also monitored. Based on information from
the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate
in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted
or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger
air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the
weight detected on the passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air
bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section. One
front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, it is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer to obtain information about
the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you
may also contact INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s
Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release
of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does
not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to
not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on the
face and chest of the front occupants. They
can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating front air bag may cause
facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
Even with INFINITI Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the front occupants.
Because of this, the force of the front air bag
inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against, the
front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child
restraints can increase the risk or severity
of injury in an accident.
LRS0865
CONDITION
DESCRIPTION
Empty
Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger
seat
Adult in the front passenger seat
Nobody/Somebody
Adult
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may also
cause the light to operate as described above
depending on their weight.
PASSENGER AIR BAG INDICATOR
LIGHT (
)
ON (illuminated)
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an
occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag on
or off depending on the weight applied to the
front passenger seat. The status of the front
passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by
the front passenger air bag status light
which is located on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON"
position, the front passenger air bag status
light on the instrument panel illuminates for
about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front
passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED
ON (illuminated)
INHIBITED
OFF (dark)
ACTIVATED
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this section.
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If
the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not
inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other
air bags in your vehicle are not part of this
system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat
occupants, such as children, by requiring the
air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
outlined in this manual should not cause the
front passenger air bag to be automatically
turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her
weight off the seat cushion (for example, by
not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of
the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most
effective protection by the seat belt and
supplemental air bag.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat
by weight. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the INFINITI Advanced
Air Bag System is designed to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF in accordance with
the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on the
seat, its weight and the child’s weight can be
detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
INFINITI also recommends that appropriate
child restraints and booster seats be properly
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible,
the occupant classification sensor is designed
to operate as described above to turn the
front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and
to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint
to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop.
This can also result in the passenger air bag
inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt as
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not to
inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor.
Other conditions could also result in air bag
inflation, such as if a child is standing on the
seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light,
you can monitor when the front passenger air
bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it
could be that the person is a small adult, or is
not sitting on the seat properly or not using
the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status light
may or may not be illuminated, depending on
the size of the child and the type of child
restraint being used. If the air bag status light
is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag
might inflate in a crash), it could be that the
child restraint or seat belt is not being used
properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used prop-
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
erly and the occupant is positioned properly.
If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will
not illuminate even though you believe that
the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an
INFINITI retailer. An INFINITI retailer can
check system status by using a special tool.
However, until you have confirmed with a
retailer that your air bag is working properly,
reposition the occupant or child restraint in a
rear seat.
The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will take a
few seconds to register a change in the front
passenger seat status. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger
air bag system, the supplemental air bag
, located in the meter and
warning light
gauges area of the instrument panel, will be
illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger
based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual. Front
passenger seat belt buckle status is
monitored by the occupant classification
system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly
recommended that the front passenger
fasten their seat belt.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of
the seatback.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the front
passenger before the vehicle is put into
motion.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the front
passenger seat.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking
the front passenger air bag status light.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger seat
or seatback is not forced back against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor
system generally keeps the classification
locked during driving, so it is important that
you confirm that the front passenger is
properly classified prior to driving. However,
the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under
some conditions (both while driving and
when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as
outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status
light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The front
passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult,
then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight
sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the
seat cushion and the door.
∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct
any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
∙ An object weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status light
will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child
or child restraint occupying the front
passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct
any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat the vehicle should be checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several front
air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the
supplemental air bag system. This is to
prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This
could affect proper operation of the
front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the
steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional
trim material around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air
bag system and result in serious personal
injury.
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change
the front seats by placing material on the
seat cushion or by installing additional
trim material, such as seat covers, on the
seat that are not specifically designed to
assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under
the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the seat
belt system. This may affect the front air
bag system. Tampering with the seat belt
system may result in serious personal
injury.
similar to those of a higher severity impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. They may not
inflate in certain side collisions.
∙ It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
wiring harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced
immediately by a qualified repair facility.
A cracked windshield could affect the
function of the supplemental air bag
system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air bag
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain
air bag operation.
WRS0381
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain
air bags are located in the side roof rails in all
three rows. All of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate in higher severity
side collisions, although they may inflate if
the forces in another type of collision are
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care
should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help
to cushion the impact force to the head of
occupants in the front and rear outboard
seating positions in all rows. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and
the driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the side air bag.
Rear seat passengers should be seated as far
away as practical from the door finishers and
side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain
air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occupant
is too close to, or is against, these air bag
modules during inflation. The side air bag will
deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place
any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the
front seat. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if
a side air bag inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the side
air bag and curtain air bag systems. This
is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air
bag systems.
1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury. For
example, do not change the front seats
by placing material near the seatbacks or
by installing additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the side air
bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is
also recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag or curtain
air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bags
and curtain air bag system and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a
unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner
system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be made
to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the
pretensioner system may result in serious
personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with
the supplemental air bag system in certain
types of collisions. Working with the seat belt
retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the
seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved
in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor
affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat
belts are used the same way as conventional
seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with
a history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if
necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in
this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is
a malfunction, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
WRS0885
Type A (if so equipped)
1. SRS air bag warning labels (located on
the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag systems are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
LRS2910
Type B (if so equipped)
1. SRS air bag warning label (located on the
right-hand sun visor)
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If
the air bag deploys, it may cause serious
injury or death.
1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems,
pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns OFF. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side
air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be
checked and repaired. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the front air bag, side
air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner
systems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air
bag warning light remains illuminated after
inflation has occurred. These systems should
be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts
should be pointed out to the person performing
the maintenance. The ignition switch should
always be in the LOCK position when working
under the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be
replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The
air bag module and pretensioner(s)
should be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service. However, the air bag module and
pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air
bag systems and the pretensioner system
should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the
vehicle. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of a supplemental
air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap
the vehicle, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal
injury.
∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from
any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to
verify it is still functioning correctly. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service. The OCS should
be checked even if no air bags deploy as a
result of the impact. Failure to verify
proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
How to use the vehicle information
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Resetting the trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Rain-sensing auto wiper system
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Xenon headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Climate controlled seat switches
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so equipped) . . 2-48
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . . 2-49
Warning systems switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-50
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . .2-51
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Power inverter switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Power outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
12v outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
120v outlet (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Roof rack (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Dual panel moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Personal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Cargo light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
Programming trouble-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . .2-77
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
LII2544
2-2 Instruments and controls
Vent (P. 4-33)
Headlight/fog light/turn signal
switch (P. 2-45)
3.
Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-40)
4.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-16)
5.
Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-50)
Horn (P. 2-46)
6.
Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)
system switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-59)
7.
Trip reset switch (P. 2-4)
8.
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-35)
Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-35)
9.
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch (P. 2-39)
10. Center display*
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
11. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-34)
12. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-57)
13. Glove box (P. 2-59)
14. Center multi-function control
buttons*
15. Power outlet (P. 2-54)
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Shift lever (P. 5-19)
Audio system controls*
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-50)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-13)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-76)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-78)
Dynamic Driver Assistance switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-98)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-33)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System*
Steering wheel switch for audio
control*
25. Hood release (P. 3-23)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-51)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
Warning Systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-50)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)
Liftgate release switch (P. 3-23)
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)
26. Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-17)
*: Refer to the separate Infiniti InTouchTM
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-3
METERS AND GAUGES
SPEEDOMETER AND
ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer
and odometer. The speedometer is located
on the right side of the meter cluster. The
odometer is located below the vehicle information display.
LIC2254
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
2-4 Instruments and controls
6.
7.
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Changing the display
3 on the right
Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
of the combination meter to change the display as follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Trip
Resetting the trip odometer
3 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
than 1 second resets the currently displayed
trip odometer to zero.
LIC2218
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
LIC2234
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Average fuel economy and distance to empty
information is also available. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.
1 and the twin trip odometer
The odometer 䊊
2 are displayed below the vehicle informa䊊
tion display when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance
of individual trips.
Instruments and controls 2-5
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature
near the hot (H) end of the normal range,
reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range,
stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If
the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage
the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.
LIC2219
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev en1 .
gine into the red zone 䊊
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious
engine damage.
2-6 Instruments and controls
LIC2220
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is
1 when the gauge
within the normal range 䊊
needle points within the zone shown in the
illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with
the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
indicates that the fuel-filler door
The
is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
LIC2222
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After
light should
a few driving trips. the
turn off. If the light remains on after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down
hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Instruments and controls 2-7
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
or
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or
Brake warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Security indicator light
Charge warning light
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (green)
Slip indicator light
Low tire pressure warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Master warning light
High beam assist indicator (green)
(if so equipped)
Power steering warning light
High beam indicator light (blue)
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if so
equipped) will come on:
,
or
,
2-8 Instruments and controls
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
The following lights (if so equipped) come on
briefly and then go off:
,
burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed in the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For
or
,
,
,
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking
system is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information, refer to
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
or
Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine is
running, with the parking brake not applied,
stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving
could be dangerous. If you judge it to be
safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have
your vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine
stopped and/or a low brake fluid level
may increase your stopping distance and
braking will require greater pedal effort
as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid
reservoir, do not drive until the brake
system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the ABS warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system
checked, and if necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
Instruments and controls 2-9
for this service. Avoid high-speed driving and
abrupt braking. For additional information,
refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light” in this section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is
not functioning properly. Turn the engine off
and check the generator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains
on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
system warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position. It turns off after
the engine is started.
2-10 Instruments and controls
This light illuminates when the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the
vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the FEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may
indicate that the system is unavailable. For
additional information, refer to “Forward
Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that
monitors the tire pressure of all tires except
the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of
low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS
is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A
“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located in
the driver’s door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically
turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted.
After the tire is inflated to the recommended
pressure, the vehicle must be driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate
the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to
check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The light
will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service. The "Tire
Pressure Low — Add Air" warning does not
appear if the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the
likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure show on the Tire and Loading
Information label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the
tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the
TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all
tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of
less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS
may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of tires
to the four wheels correctly.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON position,
have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if
any of the following are displayed on the
vehicle information display:
∙ No key warning
∙ Low fuel warning
∙ Low washer fluid warning
∙ Parking brake release warning
∙ Door open warning
∙ Loose fuel cap warning
∙ Check tire pressure warning
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
2-12 Instruments and controls
∙ When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of the
vehicle but the steering will be harder to
operate. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates that the electric power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the hydraulic pump electric power
steering system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering but you will
still have control of the vehicle. At this time,
greater steering effort is required to operate
the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns
and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the
driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same
time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds
unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is
occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for
the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds
and then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and
pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or
the pretensioners may not function properly.
For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the front air bag, side
air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner
systems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift
lever position. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Front fog light indicator
light (green)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates
when the front fog lights are ON. For additional information, refer to “Fog light switch”
in this section.
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam assist indicator
light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights come on while the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position with the high
beams selected. This indicates that the high
beam assist is operational.
For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight
high beams are on and goes out when the
low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gal
(11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission
control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance test.
For additional information, refer to “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”
in the “Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected.
Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel
Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the cap
and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the retailer.
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid
emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
2-14 Instruments and controls
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the retailer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.
Security indicator light
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch
is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This
function indicates the security system
equipped on the vehicle is operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system
is operating, thus alerting the driver to the
fact that the road surface is slippery and the
vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the VDC
OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates
the VDC has been turned off.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the
VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will be reactivated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
indicator light also comes on when
The
you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational.
If the light does not come on have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
The VDC light also comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on or
indicator light
comes on along with the
while you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
You may feel or hear the system working; this
is normal.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
WARNING
VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound
when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not
the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or OFF position or placed in the OFF or
LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in
the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the
Intelligent Key with you when leaving the
vehicle.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
and Lane Departure Prevention
(LDP) warning chime (if so
equipped)
When the LDW or LDP system is on, the
chime sounds if the vehicle is traveling close
to either the left or the right of a traveling
lane with detectable lane markers.
Instruments and controls 2-15
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system” or “Lane
Departure Prevention (LDP) system” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ Indicators and warnings
∙ Tire Pressure information
∙ Other information
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.
Intelligent Key door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one
of the following improper operations is found.
∙ The ignition switch is not returned to the
LOCK position when locking the doors.
∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors.
∙ The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
∙ Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key System. For
additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intelligent Key” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
2-16 Instruments and controls
LIC2205
The vehicle information display is located to
the left of the speedometer. It displays such
items as:
∙ Vehicle settings
∙ Trip computer information
∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if so
equipped)
∙ Cruise control system information (if so
equipped)
∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so
equipped) system information
∙ Intelligent Key operation information
2.
— navigate through the items in
the vehicle information display
ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display
1. Press the
button until you reach
the trip computer mode.
— go back to the previous menu
3.
buttons also control
The ENTER and
audio and control panel functions. For additional information, refer to the separate
Infiniti InTouchTM Owner’s Manual.
button again for more
2. Press the
than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel
consumption, average speed, distance
to empty, and journey time.
STARTUP DISPLAY
LIC2245
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be navi,
, ENTER ,
gated using the
and
buttons located on the steering
wheel.
1.
— select/enter the vehicle information display menu items or to change
from one display screen to the next (i.e.
trip, TPMS, fuel economy)
RESETTING THE TRIP
COMPUTER
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the vehicle
information include:
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle information display:
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
∙ Active system status (if so equipped)
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ Trip computer
∙ Main Menu Selection
∙ Tire pressure information
∙ Body Color
∙ Fuel economy
∙ Maintenance
∙ Warnings
∙ Alarms
Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For additional information refer to,
“Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” section of this manual.
∙ Language
To control what items display in the vehicle
information display, refer to “Main menu selection” section of this manual.
∙ Factory Reset
∙ Units
∙ Welcome Effects
Instruments and controls 2-17
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user to
change the various driving aids.
Menu item
Driving Aids
Forward
Assistance (DCA)
Lane
Lane
Assistance (LDP)
Blind Spot
Blind Spot
Assistance (BSI)
Brightness
Back-Up Collision Interv.
Ignition On Status
Emergency Braking
System
2-18 Instruments and controls
Result
Displays available driving aids.
Displays available forward driving aids.
Allows user to turn the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Distance
Control Assist (DCA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available lane driving aids.
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Lane
Departure Prevention (LDP) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available blind spot driving aids and settings.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Intervention® (BSI) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to choose between standard (STD), dark or bright settings for the blind spot display.
Displays available Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) options.
Allows user to turn the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to
“Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available emergency braking options.
Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system” and “Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change
the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys,
and other vehicle settings.
Menu item
Rear Door Alert
Off
Alert & Horn
Alert Only
Welcome Light
Auto Room Lamp
Light Sensitivity
Light Off Delay
Rain Sensor (if so equipped)
Wiper with Speed
I-Key Door Lock
Selective Unlock
Result
Displays available rear door alert options.
When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds.
When selected, only the alert is displayed.
Allows the user the turn the welcome light on or off.
Allows the user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Allows the user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Allows the user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.
Allows user to turn the rain sensor on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in this
section.
Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off. For additional information, refer to Wiper and washer
switch” in this section.
Allows user to turn the I-Key door lock on or off. When this item is turned on, the request switch on the door is
activated.
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door
unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to
be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door
unlock operation is performed once.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Menu item
Auto Door Unlock
Off
IGN Off
Shift into P
Answer Back Horn
Remote Start (if so equipped)
Battery Saver
Exit Seat Slide (if so equipped)
Exit Steering Up (if so equipped)
2-20 Instruments and controls
Result
Displays the options for the auto door unlock.
Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will
flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “Answer back
horn feature” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the remote engine start on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started using the
Intelligent Key.
Allows the user to turn the battery saver feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will turn off the ignition
switch after a period of time if left in the ACC or ON position.
Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle
and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For
additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of
this manual.
Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering
wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into
the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Main Menu Selection
The main menu selection menu allows the
user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display when
the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Menu item
Tire Pressures
Trip Computer
Audio
Navigation (if so equipped)
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
Fuel Economy
Result
Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the audio display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the driver assistance display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Body Color
The body color menu allows the user to select
the color of vehicle that appears in the vehicle
information display.
Menu item
Body Color
Result
Displays the available colors for the vehicle in the vehicle information display.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set
reminders for various vehicle maintenance
items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire
pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing wheels and tires” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions
Menu item
Service
Tire
Other
2-22 Instruments and controls
affect tire wear and when tires should be
replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not
mean your tires will last that long. Use the
tire replacement indicator as a guide only
and always perform regular tire checks.
Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to a collision, which
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Result
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other
than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. You
can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set or reset the distance for service type
items.
For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance
for replacing tires.
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other
than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The
distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.
Alarms
The alarms menu allows the user to set various alerts.
Menu item
Outside Temp.
Timer Alert
Navigation (if so equipped)
Result
Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.
Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval.
Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.
Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the vehicle
information display.
Menu item
Language
Result
Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.
Unit
The unit menu allows the user to customize
the information that appears in the vehicle
information display.
Menu item
Mileage
Tire Pressures
Temperature
Result
Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display.
Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display.
Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Welcome Effect
The welcome effect menu allows the user to
control the welcome effect feature.
Menu item
Welcome Effect
Result
Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Menu item
Factory Reset
2-24 Instruments and controls
Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the
user can confirm or deny the reset.
LIC3751
Instruments and controls 2-25
VEHICLE INFORMATION
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
31. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped)
18. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so
equipped)
32. Cruise control indicators (if so equipped)
19. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)
2. Key ID Incorrect
3. Key Battery Low
4. I-Key System
Manual
17. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
20. Door Open
Error:
See
Owner’s
5. Key Registration Complete
6. Push brake and start switch to drive
7. Push Ignition to OFF
8. Shift to Park
9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system (if I-Key battery level is low)
10. Release Parking Brake
11. Low Fuel
12. Loose Fuel Cap
13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
14. Low Washer Fluid
15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
2-26 Instruments and controls
33. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector indicators
34. Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so
equipped)
21. Liftgate Open
35. Unavailable: Snow Mode Active (if so
equipped)
22. Timer Alert – Have a break?
36. Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)
23. Low Outside Temperature
37. Unavailable: High Cabin Temp. (if so
equipped)
24. Power will turn off to save the battery
25. Turn off the lights
26. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s
Manual
27. Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW) indicator (if so equipped)
28. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped)
29. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
30. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
38. Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)
39. Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp. (if
so equipped)
40. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)
41. BCI OFF (if so equipped)
42. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
43. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
44. Rear Door Alert is activated
45. Check Back Seat For All Articles
No Key Detected
I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON or ACC position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, this light comes on for a period of
time and then turns off.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with an
unregistered key.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Key Battery Low
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
The I-Key System Error message warns of a
malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.
If the light comes on while the engine is
stopped, it may be impossible to start the
engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in
these cases, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Key Registration Complete
This appears when a new Intelligent Key is
registered to the vehicle.
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle
has been started using the Remote Engine
Start (if so equipped) function.
pedal depressed. You can start the engine
from any position of the ignition switch.
Push Ignition to OFF
After the Push Ignition to OFF warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position
when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the
LOCK position.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the
shift lever is in any position other than P
(Park). Also, a chime sounds when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position or start the
engine.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key System” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
This indicator means that the engine will start
by pushing the ignition switch with the brake
Instruments and controls 2-27
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with
the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake
pedal. For additional information, refer to
“INFINITI Intelligent Key battery discharge” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message area
of the vehicle information display when the
parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as
it is convenient, preferably before the fuel
gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a
small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap
is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. For additional information, re-
2-28 Instruments and controls
fer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears in the message area of
the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed
to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure
warning is not designed to indicate a low oil
level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level.
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
Low Washer Fluid
This warning illuminates when the
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshieldwasher fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
hicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four
tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when there is an error
with your TPMS. If this warning comes on,
have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the all-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly while
the engine is running.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates
and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the ve-
This warning may appear while trying to free
a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to
2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling,
as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the
warning turns off, you can continue driving.
Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual (if
so equipped)
This warning may appear if there is a large
difference between the diameters of the
front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a
safe area, with the engine idling. Check that
all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire
pressure is correct and that the tires are not
excessively worn.
Door Open
This warning illuminates when a door has
been opened.
Liftgate Open
This warning illuminates when the liftgate
has been opened.
Timer Alert — Have a break?
This indicator appears when the set time is
reached. The time can be set up to six hours.
For additional information, refer to “Settings”
in this section.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 3°C (37°F). The temperature
can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to
“Settings” in this section.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON position
and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional
information, refer to “Push-button ignition
switch positions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Turn off the lights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch to OFF or
AUTO position. For additional information,
refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in
this section.
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW) indicator (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Warning
systems switch” in this section and “Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
(if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the LDW system
is engaged.
For additional information, refer to ”Warning
systems switch” in this section and “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW and
RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
This indicator shows when the PFCW system
is engaged.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of
the following systems (if so equipped) is not
functioning properly:
∙ Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)
∙ Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)
∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
∙ Distance Control Assist (DCA)
If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators
(if so equipped)
These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system status. For additional
information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Cruise control indicators (if so equipped)
These indicators show the cruise control system status.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise
control” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
INFINITI Drive Mode Selector indicators
These indicators show the current drive
mode of the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Drive Mode Selector” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Road is slippery (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the Distance
Control Assist (DCA), Lane Departure Prevention (LDP), or Blind Spot Intervention®
(BSI) systems become unavailable because
the road is slippery. For additional information, refer to “Distance Control Assist (DCA)”,
“Lane Departure Prevention (LDW)”, or “Blind
Spot Intervention® (BSI)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Snow Mode Active (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the Distance
Control Assist (DCA), Lane Departure Prevention (LDP), or Blind Spot Intervention®
(BSI) systems become unavailable because
the Snow Mode is selected. For additional
information, refer to “Distance Control Assist
(DCA)”, “Lane Departure Prevention (LDW)”,
or “Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: VDC OFF (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Distance
Control Assist (DCA), Lane Departure Prevention (LDP), or Blind Spot Intervention®
(BSI) systems become unavailable because
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) is turned
off. For additional information, refer to “Distance Control Assist (DCA)”, “Lane Departure
Prevention (LDW)”, or “Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: High Cabin Temp. (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than
40°C (104°F). For additional information, refer to “Distance Control Assist (DCA)”, “Lane
Departure Prevention (LDW)”, “Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)” or “Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the Blind Spot
Warning (BSW), Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA), Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI), or
Backup Collision Intervention systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is
detected. For additional information, refer to
“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)”, “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA)”, “Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)”, or “Backup Collision Intervention” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp. (if so
equipped)
This message appears when the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system becomes unavailable because of an interior temperature
greater than approximately 104°F (40°C).
For additional information, refer to “Backup
Collision Intervention (BCI)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if so
equipped)
tional information, refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section.
This message appears when the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC), Distance Control Assist
(DCA), Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)
with Pedestrian Detection, or Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW) systems become unavailable because the front radar is
obstructed. For additional information, refer
to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”, “Distance
Control Assist (DCA)”, “Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection”, or
“Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
BCI OFF (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system is turned off
using the BCI switch. For additional information, refer to “Backup Collision Intervention
(BCI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this warning
comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service.
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the rear door alert system is
active and can remind the driver to check the
back seat.
∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the
display for a period of time. If no selection
is made, this message automatically turns
off after a period of time.
∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
can select “Disable Alert” to disable the
horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For addi-
Instruments and controls 2-31
SECURITY SYSTEMS
WARNING
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a stop
within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts* can be provided for other
stops during the trip. Selecting “Disable
Alert” turns off the Rear Door Alert system
for the remainder of a trip and no audible
alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables
it using the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “How to use
the vehicle information display” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert” in this section.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables
it using the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “How to use
the vehicle information display” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert” in this section.
LIC0661
Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
∙ Vehicle security system
∙ INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
Check Back Seat For All Articles
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the
D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the
driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts
the driver, after a period of time, to check for
items in the rear seat after the audible alert
has been provided.
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone opens
the doors, liftgate or hood when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion detection
type system that activates when a vehicle is
moved or when a vibration occurs.
2-32 Instruments and controls
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of
interior or exterior vehicle components in all
situations. Always secure your vehicle even if
parking for a brief period. Never leave your
Intelligent Key in the vehicle, and always lock
the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of
your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit
areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification
markers, and tracking systems, are available
at auto supply stores and specialty shops. An
INFINITI retailer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to
see if you may be eligible for discounts for
various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof.
The system can be armed even if the
windows and moonroof are open.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock
all doors. The doors can be locked with
the Intelligent Key, door handle request
switch or power door lock switch.
Key fob operation:
indicator light
4. Confirm that the
indicator stays illucomes on. The
minated for a period of time indicating
that the system is in the pre-armed
phase.
indicator light will blink every
The
3 seconds once the security system is
armed.
If during the pre-armed phase one of the
following occurs, the system will not
arm:
∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechanical key
∙ A door is opened with the release button with the Intelligent Key on your
person
∙ The doors are unlocked using the unlock button on the Intelligent Key
∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and liftgate are locked with the ignition switch
placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
∙ The turn signals blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after a
period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door or liftgate with
button
the key, or by pressing the
on the Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ opening the door or liftgate without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the
door is unlocked by releasing the door
inside lock switch).
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position
Instruments and controls 2-33
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the liftgate with the key, pressing
button on the Intelligent Key, or
the
pressing the request switch on the driver’s or
passenger’s door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will
not allow the engine to start without the use
of a registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for
example, when interference is caused by another INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart
the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
2-34 Instruments and controls
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI
recommends placing the registered INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate
key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
If the light still remains on and/or the engine
will not start, seek service for the INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that
you have. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
LIC3755
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever
the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position. This function indicates the
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Type A (if so equipped)
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
Instruments and controls 2-35
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-washer
fluid concentrates may permanently
stain the grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
LIC3756
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
windshield-washer fluid concentrate and
water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately
1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate
the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at
the following speed:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster). Also,
toward 䊊
the intermittent operation speed varies in
accordance with the vehicle speed. (For
example, when the vehicle speed is high,
the intermittent operation speed will be
faster.) Further, if so equipped, the rainsensing feature will adjust the speed of
the intermittent operation. For additional
information, refer to “Rain-sensing auto
wiper system” in this section.
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation
4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up 䊊
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
NOTE:
∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is
left in the AUTO position, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or
around the sensor. The wipers may also
operate when exhaust gas or moisture
affect the rain sensor.
The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in this section.
∙ When the windshield glass is coated with
water repellent, the speed of the rainsensing auto wipers may be higher even
though the amount of the rainfall is small.
LIC2901
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not touch the rain sensor and around
it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO
position and the ignition switch is in the
ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or may
damage a wiper.
∙ Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto
wiper system when you use a car wash.
∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor
even if it is raining.
∙ Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is
recommended for proper operation of
the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For
additional information, refer to “Windshield wiper blades” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-37
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the
wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the
vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located
on the upper part of the windshield.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,
1 . The
place the lever in the AUTO position 䊊
wiper will sweep once while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front
2 (High) or toward the rear 䊊
3 (Low).
䊊
– High — High sensitive operation
– Low — Low sensitive operation
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system
off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or
rotate the lever to the LO or HI position.
For additional information on disabling the
rain-sensing feature, refer to “How to use the
vehicle information display” in “Vehicle information display” in this section.
2-38 Instruments and controls
LIC3129
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the rear window with the
defroster before you wash the rear
window.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshield-washer
fluid concentrates may permanently
stain the grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
windshield-washer fluid concentrate and
water.
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the
snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms.
After about 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH
The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
1
䊊
2
䊊
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not adjustable)
NOTE:
Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation
The top and bottom few rows of wires on the
rear window are not part of the rear window
defroster system. These wires make up the
antenna for the audio system.
3 to operate the
Push the switch forward 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
LIC2923
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors:
Start the engine and push the rear window
defroster switch. The rear window defroster
indicator light on the display screen comes
on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-39
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS
WARNING
cHIGH
VOLTAGE
∙ When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or
disassemble. Always have your xenon
headlights replaced by a certified service
technician. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights.
If they are not correctly aimed, they
might temporarily blind an oncoming
driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights are
not aimed correctly, immediately take
your vehicle to a certified service technician and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned
on, its brightness or color varies slightly.
However, the color and brightness will soon
stabilize.
∙ The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation.
It is generally desirable not to turn off
the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic
signal).
∙ If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become
reddish. If one or more of the above signs
appear, it is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for service.
SIC3267
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊
2
䊊
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come on.
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
2-40 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time
delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
1 .
position 䊊
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
SIC3268
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to
turn on and off automatically. The autolight
system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights
automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights (except daylight
running lights) when it is light.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left
open, the headlights remain on for a period of
time. If another door is opened while the
headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
, or
position.
switch to the OFF,
LIC2237
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the
1 of
autolight sensor located in the top side 䊊
the instrument panel. The autolight sensor
controls the autolight; if it is covered, the
autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and
the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs
while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
Instruments and controls 2-41
High Beam Assist (if so equipped)
The High Beam Assist system will operate
when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If
an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be
switched to the low beam automatically.
WARNING
SIC3269
Headlight beam select
1
䊊
2
䊊
䊊
3
To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward. The high beam lights
light illuminates.
come on and the
Pull the lever back to select the low
beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
2-42 Instruments and controls
∙ The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe
driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving
practices and switch the high beams and
low beam manually when necessary.
∙ The high beam or low beam may not
switch automatically under the following
conditions. Switch the high beam and low
beam manually.
– When the headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the leading vehicle are
turned off, when the color of the light
is affected due to foreign materials on
the lights, or when the light beam is
out of position.
– When there is a sudden, continuous
change in brightness.
– When driving on a road that passes
over rolling hills, or a road that has
level differences.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When a sign or mirror-like surface is
reflecting intense light towards the
front of the vehicle.
– When the container, etc. being towed
by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
wind, etc.).
– When a headlight on your vehicle is
damaged or dirty.
– When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the
vehicle.
– When the vehicle is leaning at an angle
due to a punctured tire, being towed,
etc.
When the vehicle speed lowers to less than
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system, turn
position or
the headlight switch to the
select the low beam position by placing the
lever in the neutral position.
∙ The timing of switching the low beam and
high beam may change under the following situations.
– The brightness of the headlights of
the oncoming vehicle or leading
vehicle.
– The movement and direction of the
oncoming vehicle and the leading
vehicle.
– When only one light on the oncoming
vehicle or the leading vehicle is
illuminated.
– When the oncoming vehicle or the
leading vehicle is a two-wheeled
vehicle.
– Road conditions (incline, curve, the
road surface, etc.).
– The number of passengers and the
amount of luggage.
LIC3618
High Beam Assist operation
To activate the High Beam Assist system,
turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 and push the lever forward 䊊
2 (high
tion 䊊
beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the
headlights are turned on.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does
not illuminate in the above condition, it may
indicate that the system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-43
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the ambient image sensor. Do not touch
the sensor lens that is located on the
ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged due
to an accident, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
or
position, the headlights
the
will turn off after a period of time.
LIC3638
Ambient image sensor maintenance
1 for the High
The ambient image sensor 䊊
Beam Assist system is located in front of the
inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the High Beam Assist system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the ambient image sensor.
2-44 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
The Battery Saver system may be disabled.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM
The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the
engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) system operates with the headlight
switch in the OFF position. When you turn
position for
the headlight switch to the
full illumination, the LED lights switch from
LED DRL system to the park function.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the LED DRL system does
not illuminate. The LED DRL system illuminates when the parking brake is released. The
LED DRL system will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights.
Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does
not latch, and release the lever. The turn
signal will automatically flash three
times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a
lane change based on road and traffic conditions.
LIC2235
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
A to increase the brightPress the “+” button 䊊
ness of instrument panel lights.
SIC3271
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1
䊊
B to decrease the
Press the “-” button 䊊
brightness of instrument panel lights.
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
2
䊊
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does
not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold
the lever until the lane change is completed.
Instruments and controls 2-45
HORN
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT
SWITCHES (if so equipped)
SIC3272
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the headlight
switch to the
position, then rotate the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then rotate the fog light switch to
position.
the
To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high
beam headlights are selected.
2-46 Instruments and controls
LIC2227
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on
the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
SIC4334
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
climate controlled seats if you or the occupants can not monitor seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in those body
parts in contact with the seat. Use of the
climate controlled seats by such people
could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the climate
control seat is operated while the engine
is not running.
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
∙ Do not use the climate control seat for
extended periods or when no one is using
the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
The climate controlled seat warms up or
cools down the front seat by blowing warm
or cool air from under the surface of the seat.
The climate control switch is located on the
center console.
The climate controlled seat can be operated
as follows:
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
objects. This may result in damage to the
climate controlled seat.
1. Start the engine.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth
3. Adjust the desired amount of air using
the control knob. The climate controlled
seat blower remains on low speed for
approximately 60 seconds after turning
the switch on or selecting the desired
temperature.
∙ The climate controlled seat has an air filter. Do not operate the climate controlled
seat without an air filter. This may result
in damage to the system.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate,
turn the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
A to the heat side
2. Turn the control knob 䊊
1 or the cool side 䊊
2 . The indicator light
䊊
B on the control knob will illuminate.
䊊
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or
cooled, or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the control knob to the
OFF (center) position. The indicator light
B on the control knob goes off with the
䊊
switch in the OFF (center) position.
To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, it is recommended that you contact an INFINITI retailer.
SSS0911
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is not
running.
Instruments and controls 2-47
HEATED 2ND ROW SEAT SWITCHES
(if so equipped)
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the center
console and can be operated independently
of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2-48 Instruments and controls
A to the right 䊊
1
2. Turn the control knob 䊊
and select the desired heat range.
∙ For high heat, turn the knob to the
1 .
right 䊊
∙ For low heat, turn the knob to the left
2 .
䊊
B will illuminate
∙ The indicator light 䊊
when the heater is on.
3. To turn off the heater, return the knob to
3 . Make sure that the
the OFF position 䊊
indicator light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a control
module, automatically turning the heater
on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long
as the switch is on.
When the seat is warmed, or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
LIC3037
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is not
running.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH
(if so equipped)
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar
materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
The rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the rear of
the front center console and can be operated
independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and
off. The indicator light will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
LIC0421
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F
(20°C).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on
to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.
Instruments and controls 2-49
WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so
equipped)
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.
The warning systems switch is used to turn
on and off the warning systems (Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Blind Spot Warning
(BSW), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA))
that are activated (if so equipped) using the
settings menu on the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch
is turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.
When the warning systems switch is turned
1 on the switch is off. The
off, the indicator 䊊
indicator will also be off if the warning system is deactivated using the settings menu.
LIC2225
WARNING
When this switch is activated the following
Warning Systems (if so equipped) are
turned off and will not work.
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
2-50 Instruments and controls
The LDW system warns the driver with a
warning light and chime that the vehicle is
beginning to leave the driving lane. For additional information, refer to “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
The BSW system will turn on the side indicator light, located next to the outside mirrors, if
the radar detects a vehicle in the detection
zone. If the turn signal is activated in the
direction of the detected vehicle, a chime
sounds twice and the side indicator light will
flash. For additional information, refer to
“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of
an approaching vehicle when the driver is
backing out of a parking space. If the system
detects an approaching vehicle from either
side, the system chimes (once) and the side
BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the
side the vehicle is approaching from. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
LIC3344
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be
reduced even if the accelerator is depressed
to the floor. If maximum engine power is
needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC
system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
indicator will come
OFF switch. The
on.
Instruments and controls 2-51
REAR DOOR ALERT
The rear door alert system functions under
certain conditions to indicate there may be an
object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check
the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The rear door alert system is initially disabled.
The driver can enable the system using the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this section.
When the system is enabled:
∙ The system is activated when a rear door
is opened and closed approximately
10 minutes before the vehicle is started.
When the vehicle is started and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert is activated” in this section.
∙ If a rear door is opened and closed but
the vehicle is not started within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be
activated. A rear door must be opened
and closed and the car started within
10 minutes for the system to activate.
When the rear door alert system is activated
and a driver exits the vehicle after arriving at a
destination:
2-52 Instruments and controls
∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P
(Park) position, a message appears in the
vehicle information display for a driver to
“Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” if
desired.
∙ With the system enabled, when the driver
exits the vehicle, an audible alert (horn
sound) will occur unless a rear door is
opened and closed within a short time to
deactivate the alert.
∙ If the doors are locked before the alert is
deactivated by opening a rear door, the
horn will sound.
∙ If the system is activated but the rear
liftgate is opened before opening a rear
door, the horn will be delayed until after
the liftgate is closed.
∙ If the audible horn alert occurs, a message will also appear in the vehicle information display that states, “Check Back
Seat for All Articles”.
WARNING
• If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no audible alert will be provided regardless of
rear door open/close status.
• There may be times when there is an object
or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example,
this may occur if the engine is turned off
and then on again in a short period of time
during a trip, or if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
• The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is
opened and closed, indicating that there
may be something in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds
but there are no objects or passengers in the
rear seat(s).
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Door Alert is activated” in this section.
POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so
equipped)
E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ Do not attempt to use this while driving.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory, doing so could
significantly drain the battery of your
vehicle.
LIC2231
LIC3376
To use the outlets for devices that require
120v power, place the ignition in the ON
position and push the power inverter switch.
The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in
combination with an Infiniti InTouch™ Services subscription to call for assistance in
case of an emergency.
The switch will illuminate when enabled.
Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription) reach a Response Specialist that will
provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle’s occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle,
refer to www.InfinitiUSA.com/intouch or call
855–444–7244.
Instruments and controls 2-53
POWER OUTLETS
LIC3624
Instrument Panel
12V OUTLETS
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The instrument panel and console power
outlets are powered only when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position.
The power outlet in the cargo area is powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.
2-54 Instruments and controls
LIC3737
Center Console
LIC2207
2nd Row (if so equipped)
∙ Do not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned OFF.
LIC2236
Cargo Area
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a
12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
Do not allow water or any other liquid to
contact the outlet.
LIC2215
2nd Row
120V OUTLET (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
∙ Do not use accessories that exceed a
120V, 150W power draw. Do not use
double adaptors or more than one electrical accessory.
Instruments and controls 2-55
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned OFF.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
Do not allow water or any other liquid to
contact the outlet.
The extended storage switch is pulled out
when in transit from the factory to the retailer. It is located in the fuse panel to the left
of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel. If any electrical equipment does not
operate, ensure the extended storage switch
is pushed fully in place, as shown.
2-56 Instruments and controls
LIC3266
LDI2758
Pulled position
STORAGE
LIC3268
Pushed position
LIC3546
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
LIC1328
SEATBACK POCKETS
The seatback pockets may be located on the
back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s seats.
The pockets can be used to store maps.
Instruments and controls 2-57
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the front
passenger’s INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System (if so equipped), please observe the
following items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat
to push or pull on the seatback pocket or
head restraint/head rest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/head rest or in the seatback
pocket.
LIC3282
Front console
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sudden
stop.
2-58 Instruments and controls
LIC2214
Rear armrest
LIC2243
WIC1120
LIC0702
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE BOX
Lower half
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use
1 or unlocking
the master key when locking 䊊
2 the glove box.
䊊
Upper half
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open
the lower half of the console box. A power
outlet is located inside the console box and
there is storage for compact discs.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box.
The upper half of the console box may be
used for storage of cellular phones. An access
hole is provided at the front of the upper half
of the console box for a phone or iPod® cord
routing to the power outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-59
CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses
holder while parking in direct sunlight.
The heat may damage the sunglasses.
LIC3623
SIC4344
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
1 and
To open the sunglasses holder, push 䊊
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s
view and to help prevent an accident.
2-60 Instruments and controls
Front console
CUP HOLDERS
LIC2212
2nd row
WARNING
∙ Do not recline the 2nd row seatback
when you use the cup holders on the rear
armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they
may scald the passengers.
∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can
scald you or your passenger.
LIC3514
3rd row
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard
objects can injure you in an accident.
LIC2209
Bottle holder — front
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in the
vehicle and possibly injure people during
sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
Instruments and controls 2-61
LIC2210
Bottle holder — rear
LIC2244
Type A (if so equipped)
CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN
To access the floor storage area (Type A),
1 to raise the handle, then pull
push down 䊊
up on the handle to lift the luggage board.
To access the floor storage area (Type B),
raise the handle.
2-62 Instruments and controls
LIC3513
Type B (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
LIC3684
LUGGAGE HOOKS
When securing items using luggage hooks
located on the side finisher do not apply a
load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single
hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.
(490 N) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in the
cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo
area. Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the top tether
strap is damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
LIC2386
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not apply any load directly to the roof side
rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the
vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross
bars are available through an INFINITI retailer. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side
rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg), however do not exceed the accessory cross bars load capacity.
Instruments and controls 2-63
WINDOWS
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front
and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located
on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification
label (located on the driver’s door pillar). For
additional information regarding GVWR and
GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”
in the “Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Always install the cross bars onto the
roof side rails before loading cargo of any
kind. Loading cargo directly onto the
roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof may
cause vehicle damage.
∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the cross
bars.
∙ Heavy loading of the cross bars has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or unusual
handling maneuvers.
∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.
2-64 Instruments and controls
∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross
bars load capacity.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in
motion and before closing the windows.
Use the window lock switch to prevent
unexpected use of the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave children,
people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly
become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and
pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for
a period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or
passenger’s door is opened during this period
of time, the power to the windows is canceled.
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front and
rear passenger windows.
The window can be partially opened by pushA down lightly until the deing the switch 䊊
sired window position is reached. To close
B up
the window partially, pull the switch 䊊
until the desired window position is reached.
Locking passengers’ windows
SIC4352
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Driver side automatic switch
Front passenger side automatic
switch
Left rear passenger automatic
switch
Right rear passenger automatic
switch
Window lock button
C is deWhen the window lock button 䊊
pressed, only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the
window lock function.
SIC4353
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window.
To open the window partially, push the
switch down lightly until the desired window
position is reached. To close the window partially, pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached.
Instruments and controls 2-65
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
LIC0410
LIC0410
Rear power window switch
Automatic operation
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
partially open the window, push the switch
down lightly until the desired window position is reached. To partially close the window,
pull the switch up lightly until the desired
window position is reached.
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch
down to the second detent and release it; it
need not be held. The window automatically
opens all the way. To stop the window, lift
the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the
second detent and release it; it need not be
held. To stop the window, push the switch
down while the window is closing.
2-66 Instruments and controls
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate properly. If this occurs, it is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught
in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
To stop the roof, push the switch once more
while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push
1 and rethe switch to the tilt up position 䊊
lease it; it need not be held. To tilt down the
moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down
2 .
position 䊊
Resetting the moonroof switch
LIC2313
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is
opened during this period of time, the power
to the moonroof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the
2 or close 䊊
1 position
switch to the open 䊊
and release it; it need not be held. The roof
will automatically open or close all the way.
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize
the moonroof operation system.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch
forward until the moonroof stops.
3. Release the moonroof switch.
4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within
6 seconds.
5. The roof glass will Tilt-Down, SlideClose, Slide-Open, Slide-Close, Tilt-Up,
Tilt-Down.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above, have
your vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when the moonroof is closed or tilted down
by automatic operation when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the moonroof.
6. Release the switch; initialization is complete if the moonroof operates normally.
Instruments and controls 2-67
DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so
equipped)
When closing
CAUTION
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the
moonroof will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within
5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will
fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is
caught in the moonroof.
WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the
moonroof opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the moonroof is closing.
2-68 Instruments and controls
∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it
forward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
LIC2313
POWER MOONROOF
The front moonroof is a power moonroof,
the rear moonroof is fixed glass. The power
moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
moonroof is operational for a period of time,
even if the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened during
this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
Resetting the moonroof switch
To slide the moonroof:
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize
the moonroof operation system.
∙ To fully open the moonroof, push the
1 toward the open position until
switch 䊊
it reaches the second detent. If the switch
1 is pushed to the first detent, only the
䊊
sunshade will open.
∙ To fully close the moonroof, push the
2 toward the close position until
switch 䊊
it reaches the second detent. If the switch
2 is pushed to the first detent, the
䊊
moonroof will close but the sunshade will
remain open.
∙ To open or close the moonroof part way,
1 or 䊊
2 while the
release the switch 䊊
moonroof is sliding open or closed. The
moonroof will stop at the desired position.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push
1 and rethe switch to the tilt up position 䊊
lease it; it need not be held. To tilt down the
moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down
2 .
position 䊊
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch
forward until the moonroof stops.
by automatic operation when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
3. Release the moonroof switch.
4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within
6 seconds.
5. The roof glass will Tilt-Down, SlideClose, Slide-Open, Slide-Close, Tilt-Up,
Tilt-Down.
6. Release the switch; initialization is complete if the moonroof operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above, have
your vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when the moonroof is closed or tilted down
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the
moonroof will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught
in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within
Instruments and controls 2-69
5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will
fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is
caught in the moonroof.
WARNING
∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from the
sunshade arm, the arm rail and sunshade
inlet port.
WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
∙ Do not allow children near the rear sunshade system. They could be injured.
∙ Do not place objects on or near the rear
sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the
moonroof opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the moonroof is closing.
LIC2228
CAUTION
∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It
is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
Panoramic sunshade
The panoramic sunshade operates when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. The
sunshade switch is located near the roof console. When opening or closing the sunshade
the switch need not be held.
To open the sunshade:
∙ To fully open the sunshade, push the
1 toward the open position.
switch 䊊
To close the sunshade:
∙ To fully close the sunshade, push the
2 toward the close position.
switch 䊊
2-70 Instruments and controls
∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.
This could cause improper operation or
damage it.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade inlet port. Doing so may entangle
these objects in the sunshade when it is
extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the
sunshade.
∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with your
hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.
∙ Do not put any object into the sunshade
inlet port as this may result in improper
operation or damage the sunshade.
∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail as
this may result in improper operation or
damage the sunshade.
5. Sunshade drive cable will travel in the
open direction for .394 in. (10 mm) then
reverse direction and stop at the normal
close position.
6. Release the sunshade close switch. Initialization procedure is complete.
∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above, have
your vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Restarting the sunshade switch
Auto-reverse function (when
closing the sunshade)
If the sunshade does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize
the sunshade operation system.
1. Switch the vehicle ignition to the ACCESSORY or RUN mode.
2. Press and hold the sunshade close
switch.
3. Sunshade will begin moving towards the
close position only while the switch is
continually pressed. (this disables the
obstacle detection).
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all of the
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the sunshade.
The auto-reverse function can be activated
when the sunshade is closed by automatic
operation when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the sunshade occurs.
4. Sunshade will stop for about 4 seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-71
INTERIOR LIGHTS
NOTE:
The footwell lights and step lights illuminate
when the driver and passenger doors are
open regardless of the interior light switch
position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are
open to prevent the battery from becoming
discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in
a discharged battery.
SIC4357
The interior lights will automatically turn on
and stay on for a period of time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent
Key, a key or the request switch while all
doors are closed and the ignition switch is
in the OFF position.
∙ The doors and/or liftgate is opened.
∙ The switch is individually pushed.
1 is pushed, the inteWhen the ON switch 䊊
rior lights illuminate.
2 is pushed,
When the DOOR/OFF switch 䊊
the interior lights do not illuminate unless
individually pushed.
2-72 Instruments and controls
LIC2213
CONSOLE LIGHT
1 will turn on whenever
The console light 䊊
the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control in the
vehicle information display.
LIC1083
SIC4356
Rear personal lights
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the switches.
To turn them off, push the switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in
a discharged battery.
PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch
again.
SIC2063A
CARGO LIGHT
The cargo light on the overhead trim has a
three-position switch. To operate, push the
switch to the desired position.
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
ON: The light is illuminated.
DOOR: The light illuminates when the
liftgate is opened. The light turns off
when the liftgate is closed.
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of liftgate position or lock status.
Instruments and controls 2-73
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in
a discharged battery.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual hand-held
transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of
the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver buttons should be
erased for security purposes. For additional
information, refer to “Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.
2-74 Instruments and controls
WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door opener
that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured
after April 1, 1982.) A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object in
the path of a closing garage door and
then automatically stop and reverse does
not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of
serious injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure your
garage door or security gate will open
and close (if the transmitter is within
range). Make sure that people or objects
are clear of the garage door, gate, etc.,
that you are programming.
∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off
while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and
odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position
when programming HomeLink®. It is also
recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink® for
quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
LIC2365
LIC2366
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink® button
and hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release until the HomeLink® indi1 flashes slowly and then
cator light 䊊
rapidly. When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be released.
(The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.)
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers” in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-75
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
1
is
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
1 blinks rapidly
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue with
Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A
second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other
device. Do not stand on your vehicle to
perform the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button (the name
and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer but it is usually located
near where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit). If there is difficulty
locating the button, reference the garage door opener’s manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
2-76 Instruments and controls
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button
for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence up to
three times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
Step 2 with the following:
7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web
site at: www.homelink.com or call
1-800-355-3515.
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”
process to prevent possible damage to the
garage door opener components.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
AND GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during training. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“timeout” in the same manner.
NOTE:
1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink® button
and the hand-held transmitter button.
During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press
and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT
release until the HomeLink® indicator
light flashes slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly,
both buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed
with
“Programming
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember to
plug it back in when programming is
completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate the
programmed device. To operate, simply press
and release the appropriate programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button.
The amber indicator light will illuminate while
the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
∙ replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
∙ position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ press and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without
interruption.
∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 in
(2 - 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink®
is not programmed within that time, try
holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer
Affairs Department. The phone numbers are
located in the Foreword of this manual.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For
additional information, refer to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button” in this section.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode
and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming HomeLink®” Step 1.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new
Instruments and controls 2-77
device can be activated by pressing the
HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any
other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device that
has been programmed into HomeLink®.
Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device
or call the manufacturer or dealer of those
devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
2-78 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
MEMO
Instruments and controls 2-79
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
INFINITI Intelligent Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Locking with inside lock knob — Type A
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Locking with inside lock knob — Type B
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Locking with power door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
INFINITI Intelligent Key System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
INFINITI Intelligent Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
not work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Operating the power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Motion-Activated Liftgate
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Liftgate position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Tilt and telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . 3-39
Memory storage function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Setting memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
KEYS
If you lose your keys, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for duplicates by
using the key number. INFINITI does not record key numbers so it is very important to
keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be
duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
WPD0427
Type A (if so equipped)
1.
2.
3.
Intelligent Keys (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System components and
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2052
Type B (if so equipped)
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered prior to use with the
Intelligent Key System and INFINITI Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer
for this service. Since the registration process
requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent
Key components when registering new keys,
be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you
have to the INFINITI retailer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle.
Listed below are conditions or occurrences
which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
For additional information, refer to “Doors” in
this section and “Storage” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent
Key to operate the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet,
give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep
the mechanical key with you to protect your
belongings.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
To prevent the glove box from being opened
during valet hand-off, follow the procedure
below.
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical
key.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical
key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
driver’s door and glove box.
For additional information, refer to “Storage”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
DOORS
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to the
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing
key can be duplicated without knowing the
key number. As many as four INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
that you have to the INFINITI retailer for
registration. This is because the registration
process will erase the memory of all key
codes previously registered into the INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only
recognize keys coded into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Any key that is not given to the retailer at the
time of registration will no longer be able to
start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to open
the doors.
WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this
provides greater safety in the event of an
accident by helping to prevent persons
from being thrown from the vehicle. This
also helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors, and
will help keep out intruders.
∙ Before opening any door, always look for
and avoid oncoming traffic.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others and/or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and/or pets.
LPD2129
Driver’s side
LOCKING WITH KEY
SPA2726
Inside lock
LPD2681
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB — TYPE A (if so equipped)
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB — TYPE B (if so equipped)
Manual
To lock the door without the key, move the
1 , then close
inside lock to the lock position 䊊
the door.
To lock the door without the key, move the
1 , then
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊
close the door.
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
1 . To unlock, turn the key
of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
toward the rear 䊊
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
For front doors, the door can also be unlocked by pulling on the inside handle lever
3 .
one time 䊊
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Lockout protection
With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and
any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is
closed.
This function helps to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
∙ All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
SPA2727
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
1 . When locking the
side) to the lock position 䊊
door this way, be certain not to leave the key
inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front passen2 .
ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be
changed using the “Vehicle Settings” of the
vehicle information display. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
LPD2374
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR
LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially
when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed. The
FAA advises the radio waves may affect
aircraft navigation and communication
systems. Do not operate the Intelligent
Key while on an airplane. Make sure the
buttons are not operated unintentionally
when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote control function
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or
conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION
∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating
with the vehicle as it receives radio waves.
The Intelligent Key system transmits weak
radio waves. Environmental conditions may
interfere with the operation of the Intelligent
Key system under the following operating
conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function
or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately two years. If the
battery is discharged, replace it with a new
one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become
shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences
which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent
Key to operate the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2054
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch
1 .
䊊
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower, and
the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The
door will be unlocked but will not open.
Release the door handle once and pull it
again to open the door.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch 䊊
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelligent
Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
LPD2663
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket
or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch within the
range of operation.
LPD2683
Locking doors — Type A (if so
equipped)
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside buzzer sounds once.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2059
NOTE:
∙ Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key
Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in
the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in
the LOCK position.
∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.
∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles or the rear liftgate opener
switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure to have the Intelligent
Key in your possession before operating
the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
LPD2683
Locking doors — Type B (if so
equipped)
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close the driver’s door and press the
driver’s door request switch OR close all
doors and press any door request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
3. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
LPD2059
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside buzzer sounds once.
NOTE:
∙ Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated when the I-Key
Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in
the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in
the LOCK position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while the driver’s
door is open. However, doors lock with
the mechanical key even if any door is
open.
Lockout protection
∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the
door buzzer sounds.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
NOTE:
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles or the rear liftgate opener
switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the request
switch, make sure to have the Intelligent
Key in your possession before operating
the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent
Key is in the same hand that is operating the
request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other
hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on top
of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
or near metallic materials.
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
within 1 minute after pushing the request
switch.
∙ Opening any door.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a period
of time when a door is unlocked and the room
light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations:
LPD2683
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch.
3. The hazard indicator lights flash once
and the vehicle chimes once.
4. Push the door handle request switch
again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.
For power liftgate opening:
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the power liftgate request switch.
LPD2059
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
Request switches for all doors and liftgate
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door
Lock setting is switched to OFF in the vehicle settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote control.
NOTE:
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position
will unlock the door. If the door does not
unlock after returning the door handle, push
the door handle request switch to unlock the
door.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the
OFF position in vehicle settings of the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent
Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door
handles.
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless
function of the Intelligent Key. The remote
keyless function can operate at a distance of
33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions
around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are
open or not closed securely.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the
vehicle.
LPD2257
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the
gent Key.
button on the Intelli-
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in
“Selective Door Unlock” in “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
butwithin 1 minute after pressing the
ton:
∙ Opening any doors.
LPD2258
Unlocking doors
1. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
2. The hazard indicator lights flash once.
button again within
3. Press the
5 seconds to unlock all doors.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the room
light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Switching the “Auto Room Lamp” to the
OFF position in “Vehicle Settings” of the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
Opening windows
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.
∙ To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer
than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
button on the Intelligent Key.
the
The door windows cannot be closed by using
the Intelligent Key.
Linking the key fob to automatic
drive positioner memory (if so
equipped)
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
positioner, the key fob can be linked to a
memory setting.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent
Key is in range of the door handle.
WPD0414
WPD0415
Releasing the rear liftgate
Using the panic alarm
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by
performing the following:
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call
attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than
0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
button for longer than
∙ Press the
0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
button again for longer
∙ Press the
than 0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.
button is pressed during the
When the
open or close process, the liftgate motors will
button is pressed again
stop. When the
for longer than 0.5 seconds, the liftgate will
reverse direction.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
LPD2259
Answer back horn feature
If desired, the answer back horn feature can
be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
butWhen it is deactivated and the
ton is pressed, the hazard indicator lights
button is
flash twice. When the
pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
nor the horn operates.
NOTE:
WARNING SIGNALS
If you change the answer back horn and light
flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the
vehicle information display screen will show
the current mode after the ignition switch
has been cycled from the OFF to the ON
position. The vehicle information display
screen can also be used to change the answer
back horn mode.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle
from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds
from inside and outside the vehicle and a
warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three
times to confirm that the answer back horn
feature has been deactivated.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and
the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to the
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once and
the horn will sound once to confirm that the
horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not
silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle,
the vehicle system may respond differently
than expected.
Symptom
The Shift to Park warning appears on
When stopping the engine
the display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the P
The Push ignition to OFF warning ap(Park) position
pears in the display.
The Door Open warning appears on the
When opening the driver’s door to get
display and the inside warning chime
out of the vehicle
sounds continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime sounds
three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The Rear Door Alert warning message
When closing the door after getting out
appears on the display, the horn sounds
of the vehicle
three times twice, or a Check Back Seat
For All Articles warning appears on the
display.
The Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Possible Cause
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.
Remedy
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The rear door alert is activated.
Check the back seat for all articles,
press the ENTER button to clear the
Rear Door Alert warning message.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position.
Symptom
The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors
unlock.
When pushing the door handle request
The outside chime sounds for approxibutton on the
switch or the
mately 2 seconds.
Intelligent Key to lock the door
When closing the door with the inside
lock knob turned to LOCK
The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the display.
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
When pushing the ignition switch
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime sounds
three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key system warning light
in the meter illuminates in yellow.
Possible Cause
Remedy
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The battery charge is low.
Replace the battery with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Laws in some local communities may restrict
the use of remote starters. For example,
some laws require a person using Remote
Engine Start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this
section.
LPD2272
The
button will be on the INFINITI Intelligent Key if the vehicle has Remote Engine
Start. This feature allows the engine to start
from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when Remote Engine Start is used:
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating
or cooling mode depending on outside
and cabin temperatures. For additional
information, refer to “Remote Engine
Start with Intelligent Climate Control” in
the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section of this
manual.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Other conditions can affect the performance
of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to “INFINITI Intelligent Key” in this section.
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death through
unintended operation of the vehicle and/or
its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation,
do not leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources
are present near the operating location, the
Intelligent Key operating range becomes
narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not
function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is
approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE
VEHICLE
tion before driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
To use the Remote Engine Start feature to
start the engine perform the following:
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.
button to lock all
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
button until the turn signal
the
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
button for at least 2 sechold the
onds.
The following events will occur when the engine starts:
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps
listed in “Remote starting the vehicle” in this
section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function
is performed.
∙ The parking lights will turn on and remain
on as long as the engine is running.
∙ The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for
5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the
engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
∙ Extending engine run time will bring you
to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
∙ The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend
the time for an additional 10 minutes. For
additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or
a single start with an extension, are allowed
between ignition cycles.
Depress and hold the brake then push the
push-button ignition switch to the ON posi-
The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON
position and then back to the OFF position
before the Remote Engine Start procedure
can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and
until the parking lights turn
press
off.
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then
OFF.
∙ The extended engine run time has expired.
∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.
∙ The engine hood has been opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed without an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake
pedal is not depressed.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE
ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK
∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid is
in the vehicle information display.
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
the vehicle.
∙ “Remote Engine Start” is turned off in the
“Locking” section of the Vehicle Settings
menu.
∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
∙ The hood is not securely closed.
∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable when
extending engine run time.
button is not pressed and held
∙ The
for at least 2 seconds.
button is not pressed and held
∙ The
within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button.
∙ The brake is pressed.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked.
∙ The liftgate is open.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ There is a detected registered key already
inside of the vehicle.
∙ The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in
Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
The Remote Engine Start may display a
warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
HOOD
LIFTGATE
WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
cated below the driver side instrument
panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2 at the front of the
2. Push the lever 䊊
hood to the side as illustrated with your
fingertips and raise the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and
make sure it locks into place.
LPD2665
WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely closed
and latched before driving. Failure to do
so could cause the hood to fly open and
result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door
lock activation, do not leave children,
people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Additionally, the temperature inside a
closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly
become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and
pets.
∙ Always be sure that hands and feet are
clear of the door frame to avoid injury
while closing the liftgate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
OPERATING THE POWER
LIFTGATE
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.
∙ Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could
become involved in serious accidents.
LPD2212
Instrument panel switch
NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power liftgate,
the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the
power liftgate will not operate if battery
voltage is low.
Power Open:
The power liftgate automatically moves from
the fully closed position to the fully open
position in approximately 5 – 8 seconds. The
power open feature can be activated by the
button on the Intelligent Key, the instrument
panel switch or the liftgate opener switch. A
chime sounds to indicate the power open
sequence has been started.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2666
Liftgate opener switch
∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate
can be opened by the instrument panel
switch, Intelligent Key or liftgate opener
A (with the Intelligent Key in liftswitch 䊊
gate range). The liftgate will individually
unlock and open. Once the liftgate is
closed, the vehicle will remain in the unlock status.
∙ The Intelligent Key button must be held
for 0.5 seconds before the liftgate opens.
∙ The liftgate must be unlocked to open it
A and
with the liftgate opener switch 䊊
without Intelligent Key in liftgate range.
A can only be
∙ The switch on the liftgate 䊊
used to open the liftgate if the power
liftgate main switch on the instrument
panel (if so equipped) is in the ON position. For additional information, refer to
“Power liftgate main switch” in this section.
A is acti∙ If the liftgate opener switch 䊊
vated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage
and release the latch.
∙ The Intelligent Key button must be held
for 0.5 seconds before the liftgate closes.
B can only be
∙ The switch on the liftgate 䊊
used to close the liftgate if the power
liftgate main switch (if so equipped) is in
the ON position.
A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) during a power open
operation.
LPD2275
Liftgate close switch
Power Close:
The power liftgate automatically moves from
the fully open position to the secondary position. When the liftgate reaches the secondary position, the cinching motor engages and
pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position.
Power close takes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The power close feature can be activated by the button on the Intelligent Key, the
instrument panel switch or the liftgate switch
B on the liftgate. A chime sounds to indicate
䊊
the power close sequence has been started.
Stop - Reverse:
During the open/close movement, the liftgate can be stopped if the Intelligent Key,
A or 䊊
B)
instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊
is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed if the
Intelligent Key, instrument panel or liftgate
A or 䊊
B ) is pressed again.
switch (䊊
Auto Reverse:
If an obstacle is detected during power open
or power close, a warning chime will sound
and the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position. If a
second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will enter
manual mode.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the
liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch
strip during power close, the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open
position.
To open the liftgate manually, push the liftA and lift the liftgate.
gate opener switch 䊊
To close, lower and push the liftgate down
securely.
NOTE:
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, the
power close function will not operate.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the
vehicle before closing the liftgate.
LPD2666
Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the liftgate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if the power
liftgate main switch (if so equipped) is in the
ON position, if multiple obstacles have been
detected in a single power cycle, or if battery
voltage is low.
A is pushed
If the liftgate opener switch 䊊
during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can
be operated manually.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2484
LPD2513
MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE
(if so equipped)
The liftgate can be opened/closed using a
foot kicking motion when it is locked or unlocked. Two sensors along the rear bumper
(center area) can detect a forward kicking
B . The Intelligent Key must be presmotion 䊊
ent within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate to allow
using the motion-activated feature to
open/close the liftgate.
Example of a proper kick
NOTE:
To achieve proper motion activation, kick
A 2 ft (60 cm). Imwithin the kicking zone 䊊
C or
proper kicking either from side to side 䊊
D will not open/close the liftgate.
at angles 䊊
CAUTION
Before performing the kicking motion,
steady your stance to prevent any loss of
balance. Also, while making the kicking motion, take caution around hot exhaust system parts. Otherwise, there may be danger
of injury.
LPD2485
Proper kicking zone and method
While positioned at the rear of the vehicle
(center) at arms’ length distance away, begin
making the forward kicking motion. Kick the
foot under the rear bumper then immediately
return the foot back to standing position. The
kicking motion should be straight, smooth
and consistent. Your leg does not need to
touch the bumper surface but be within
3/4 inch (2 cm) to 4 inches (10 cm) of the
bumper surface. After your kick motion is
completed step back to allow the liftgate to
open/close. The liftgate should begin moving
within 1–2 seconds after the kick. This time is
needed to verify the Intelligent Key and to
validate the kick motion. Kicking again within
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
CAUTION
Interference or malfunction can be caused
by parking in close proximity to radio or
satellite towers.
LPD2486
Improper kicking methods
this time frame (1–2 seconds) could cause the
liftgate to reverse or stop.
WARNING
Prevent
unintentional
liftgate
opening/closing. There may be conditions
when opening/closing the liftgate is not
desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of the
range of the liftgate (3 ft or 1 m), when
washing or working around the back of the
vehicle.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2277
POWER LIFTGATE MAIN
SWITCH (if so equipped)
The power liftgate operation can be turned
on or off by the power liftgate main switch on
the instrument panel.
When the power liftgate main switch is
pushed to the OFF position, the power operation is not available by the power liftgate
switch on the liftgate and liftgate opener
switch.
Power operation is available when the power
liftgate main switch is in the OFF position by
pushing the instrument panel switch or
pressing the key fob button.
Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped)
will not function when the power liftgate
main switch is pushed in the OFF position.
LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ To avoid personal injury, do not attempt
to activate the power liftgate if one or
both of the liftgate struts are removed.
CAUTION
∙ If the power liftgate does not stay open
or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at
any time while a continuous warning
chime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one
or both of the liftgate struts. It is recommended that you have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if one
or both of the liftgate struts are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power
liftgate mechanisms may occur.
∙ Keep the power liftgate main switch (if so
equipped) in the OFF position when
washing or working around the back of
the vehicle (with Intelligent Key) to prevent inadvertent opening/closing.
SPA2778
Power liftgate release
If the liftgate cannot be opened with the
instrument panel switch, liftgate opener
switch or key fob due to a discharged battery,
follow these steps:
A on the inside of the
1. Remove the cover 䊊
liftgate.
B as illustrated to open
2. Move the lever 䊊
the liftgate.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer as soon as possible for repair.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3. Press and hold the power liftgate close
B located on the liftgate for
switch 䊊
more than 3 seconds or until two beeps
are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected position
setting. To change the position of the liftgate,
repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of
the liftgate.
LPD2275
LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific
height (Garage mode) by performing the following:
WPD0454
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER
DOOR
The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks
when the driver’s door is unlocked.
1. Open the liftgate using the request
switch or the Intelligent Key.
1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of
the following operations:
2. Pull the liftgate down and move to the
desired height position (the liftgate will
have some resistance when being manually adjusted).
∙ Unlock the driver’s door with the key
fob.
∙ Unlock all doors with the mechanical
key.
∙ Push the power door lock switch to
the unlock position.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ Push the door handle request switch
(with the key fob in range).
2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the
right side of the fuel-filler door to release.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and
lock the doors.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions.
You could be burned or seriously injured if
it is misused or mishandled. Always stop
the engine and do not smoke or allow
open flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type fuelfiller cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission
control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible
Malinjury. It could also cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to come
on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in the
vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can
cause an explosion of flammable liquid,
vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To
reduce the risk of serious injury or death
when filling portable fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with
the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more than
15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will
be displayed if the fuel-filler cap is not
properly tightened. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler
cap properly after the Loose Fuel Cap
warning is displayed may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to
illuminate.
∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap propMalfunction Inerly may cause the
dicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If
light illuminates because the
the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive
light should turn
the vehicle. The
off after a few driving trips. If the
light does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush
it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
LPD2065
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise
to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
LPD2066
Loose Fuel Cap warning
The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will be
displayed in the vehicle information display
when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It
may take a few driving trips for the message
to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
STEERING WHEEL
A on the steer3. Press the
button 䊊
ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off
B after
the Loose Fuel Cap warning 䊊
tightening the fuel-filler cap.
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The
driver’s air bag inflates with great force.
If you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
sitting sideways or out of position in any
way, you are at greater risk of injury or
death in a crash. You may also receive
serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if
you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as
far away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
LPD2410
TILT AND TELESCOPIC
OPERATION
To adjust the steering wheel move the switch
1 in the following directions:
䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
2 to the desired tilt position.
direction 䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
3 to the desired
backward in direction 䊊
telescopic position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
SUN VISORS
CAUTION
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Failure to reset the tilt and telescoping functions of the steering wheel, after
the vehicle’s battery has been discharged,
may prevent the steering wheel position
from being adjusted.
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner:
Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle’s battery
has been discharged in order to prevent the
tilt and telescopic operation from locking in
one position. When the battery has been recharged or replaced, perform the following:
Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver’s door is opened and the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This
lets the driver get into and out of the seat
more easily. The steering wheel moves back
into position when the driver’s door is closed
and the ignition switch is pushed.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
1 so
∙ For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊
the steering wheel moves to the highest
2 that can be reached.
position 䊊
∙ For telescopic operation: Adjust the
1 so the steering wheel moves to
switch 䊊
the most forward and backward position
3 that can be reached.
䊊
WPD0435
Performing these operations resets the range
of the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic
function.
1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
sun visor from the center mount and
2 .
swing the visor to the side 䊊
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3 sun visor in or out
3. Slide the extension 䊊
as needed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.
LPD2067
LPD2644
VANITY MIRRORS
CARD HOLDER
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. The
vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror
cover is open.
To access the card holder located on the
ceiling, pull the driver’s side sun visor down
1 . Do
and slide the card into the card holder 䊊
not view information while operating the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so
equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions
and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
1
Do not hang any objects over the sensors 䊊
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing
so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors,
resulting in improper operation.
LPD2418
Type A (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions
and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
LPD0469
Type B (if so equipped)
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the O button. The indicator light will
turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature
again, press the | button again. The indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver operation (if so
equipped), refer to the “HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
LPD2269
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
1 to select the left or
Move the small switch 䊊
right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired
2 . Move the
position using the large switch 䊊
1 to the center (neutral) posismall switch 䊊
tion to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.
LPD2303
Power folding outside mirrors
CAUTION
∙ Do not touch the mirrors while they are
moving. Your hand may be pinched, and
the mirror may malfunction.
∙ Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You
will be unable to see behind the vehicle.
2 to open the mirrors or the
Push the switch 䊊
1 to close the mirrors.
switch 䊊
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or
bumped, the mirror body can become loose
at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror
operation, cycle the mirrors by pushing the
1 until completely closed, then push
switch 䊊
2 until the mirrors are in the open
the switch 䊊
position.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both
outside mirror surfaces downward to provide
better rear visibility close to the vehicle when
the mirror control switch is in either the L or R
position.
The mirrors automatically return to their
original position when you shift out of R (Reverse).
The outside mirror surfaces will return to
their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred:
∙ The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
∙ The outside mirror control switch is set to
the neutral or center position.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
Heated mirrors
If the outside mirror control switch is in the
“center” position, the mirror surface will
NOT turn downward when the shift lever is
moved to R (Reverse).
The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For
additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
Automatic anti-glare outside mirror
(if so equipped)
The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare
from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The
automatic anti-glare feature operates only
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on
when starting the vehicle. The indicator light
on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare
feature is operating.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in this section.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has
two features:
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,
and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information,
refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual, and
“Steering wheel” and “Outside mirrors” in
this section.
∙ Memory storage function
∙ Entry/exit function
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
LPD2682
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering
column, and outside mirrors can be stored in
the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position (the vehicle should be stopped
while setting the memory).
4. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come ON and stay
ON for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The chime will sound if the memory has
been stored.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in the
same memory switch, the previous memory
position will be overwritten by the new
stored position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39
Confirming memory storage
Push the SET switch.
∙ If a memory position has been stored in
the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light
for the respective switch will stay ON for
approximately 5 seconds.
Linking a key fob to a stored
memory position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored
memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with
the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage
function” section for storing the memory
position.
2. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come ON. While the
indicator light is ON for 5 seconds, press
button on the key fob. The
the
hazard lights will flash twice. The indicator light of the linked memory switch will
blink and click twice. After the indicator
light goes off, the key fob is linked to that
memory setting.
Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, pressing
button on the key fob will move the
the
driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to the linked memory switch position.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:
NOTE:
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or
canceled through the vehicle settings in the
vehicle information display by performing the
following:
If a new memory position is stored in the
linked memory switch, then the key fob will
link the new position and overwrites the previous position.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s
seat and automatic operation steering column will automatically move when the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the
driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat
more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the
steering column will move up:
∙ When the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch placed in the OFF position.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed from
ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed from
ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to
OFF.
∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to
OFF.
Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the stored memory positions will
be lost and some of the functions will be
restricted:
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).
OR
2. Open and close the driver’s door more
than two times with the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function should now work
properly.
3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION
The position of the following settings can be
linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.
∙ Climate control system
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
To use the memory function, set the climate,
navigation and audio systems to the driver’s
preferred settings. Lock the doors with the
Intelligent Key. Each Intelligent Key may be
set with the driver’s individual preferences.
When a new Intelligent Key is used, “Connection with the key has been done” will be displayed on the vehicle information display and
the memorized settings are available.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The settings linked to the Intelligent
Key will start.
For additional information on using the Climate control system, refer to “Heater and air
conditioner (automatic)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to the
INFINITI InTouch™ Owner’s Manual or the
“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section of this manual.
∙ When the seat has already been moved
to the memorized position.
∙ When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
∙ When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to
the memorized settings.
∙ When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some
limited functions such as linking a key fob
to the meter when the power source is
turned on from off or during the exit
function.
2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driver’s
door handle request switch or the
button on the Intelligent Key.
∙ When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
To engage the memorized settings, perform
the following:
∙ When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column is turned on
while the automatic drive positioner is
operating.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41
MEMO
3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Infiniti InTouchTM Owner’s Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . .4-7
Adjusting the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
How to turn on and off predicted course
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-8
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Around View® Monitor system operation . . . . 4-12
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . 4-18
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Around View® Monitor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Adjusting the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Around View® Monitor system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Camera Aiding Sonar (parking sensor)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Sonar System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Turning ON and OFF the sonar function . . . . . 4-25
Sonar System Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Moving Object Detection (MOD)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
MOD system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Turning MOD on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
CLIMATE setting screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Rear automatic air conditioning system . . . . . . 4-40
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
USB/iPod® charging ports (if so equipped). . . . . . 4-43
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
INFINITI INTOUCHTM OWNER’S
MANUAL
Refer to the Infiniti InTouchTM Owner’s
Manual that includes the following information.
∙ Infiniti InTouchTM Services
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
∙ Viewing information
∙ Other settings
∙ Voice recognition (if so equipped)
∙ General system information
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
LHA4454
1. CAMERA
button (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView
Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
∙ The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level paved
surface. The distance viewed on the
monitor is for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the
shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) posibutton (if so
tion or when the CAMERA
equipped) is pressed. The radio can still be
heard while the RearView Monitor is active.
LHA4293
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above
1 .
the vehicle’s license plate 䊊
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) posibutton (if so
tion or press the CAMERA
equipped) to operate the RearView Monitor.
LHA1196
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to
A are displayed on the
the vehicle body line 䊊
monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
6
Predicted course lines 䊊
Indicate the predicted course when backing
up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is
in the R (Reverse) position and the steering
wheel is turned. The predicted course lines
will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed
while the steering wheel is in the straightahead position.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations
on the ground are for approximate reference
only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in
the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or
park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of
the predicted course lines are wider than the
actual width and course.
LHA4216
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
LHA4217
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1201
Backing up near a projecting object
A do not touch
The predicted course lines 䊊
the object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the actual
backing up course.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4218
Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the object
the position 䊊
A if the
when backing up to the position 䊊
object projects over the actual backing up
course.
HOW TO PARK WITH
PREDICTED COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes
discharged, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following
procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
LHA1197
LHA1198
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for
more than 5 minutes.
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted
B enter the parking space
course lines 䊊
C.
䊊
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel
the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring
to the parking space 䊊
to the predicted course lines.
NOTE:
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,
Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make
sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF
PREDICTED COURSE LINES
To toggle on and off the predicted course
lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Press the SETTING button.
LHA4243
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the
RearView Monitor, press the SETTING button with the RearView Monitor on. Select
one of the items and change the value by
touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the
INFINITI controller.
2. Touch the Camera or Camera/Sonar
key.
3. Touch the Camera key.
4. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to
turn the feature on or off.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ The system cannot completely eliminate
blind spots and may not show every
object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on
the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects close
to the bumper or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the rearview and outside
mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed
above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision
instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or
an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be clear
in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth dampened
with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then
wipe with a dry cloth.
∙ When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not clearly display
objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected
light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam1 , the RearView Monitor may not disera 䊊
play objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a
dry cloth.
LHA4293
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so
equipped)
LHA4454
1. CAMERA
button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the
Around View® Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The Around View® Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation because it has
areas where objects cannot be viewed.
The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or
rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen format.
Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
∙ Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the front of the vehicle.
∙ Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
∙ Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
∙ Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
∙ Front-Wide View
An approximately 180–degree view of
the front the vehicle.
∙ Rear-Wide View
An approximately 180–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
The Around View® Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations
such as slot parking or parallel parking.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4347
To display the multiple views, the Around
View® Monitor system uses cameras located
in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside
mirrors and one just above the vehicle’s li1 .
cense plate 䊊
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) posibutton to
tion or press the CAMERA
operate the Around View® Monitor.
When the camera is first activated with the
bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon will
flash on the screen. This indicates that the
sonar system is activated. For additional information on the front and rear sonar system
(if so equipped), refer to “Front and Rear
Sonar System” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Available views
WARNING
∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width lines should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a paved, level
surface. The apparent distance viewed
on the monitor may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle and
displayed objects.
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye
view as a reference. The lines and the
bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by
the number of occupants, cargo, fuel
level, vehicle position, road condition and
road grade.
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines and
the bird’s-eye view may be displayed
incorrectly.
∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than
they appear. When driving the vehicle
down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor
are closer than they appear.
∙ Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed
in the monitor and outside mirrors.
∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course lines and the actual
course line.
∙ The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
∙ The displayed lines will appear slightly
off to the right, because the rearview
camera is not installed in the rear center
of the vehicle.
SAA1840
Front view
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
A are disreference to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
The front view will not be displayed when the
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view
and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and left predicted course
6 are displayed. When the steering
lines 䊊
wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line
is displayed only on the opposite side of the
turn.
SAA1896
Rear view
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
Indicate the approximate vehicle width when
backing up.
6 :
Predicted course lines 䊊
Indicate the predicted course when operating
the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the steering
wheel is turned. The predicted course lines
will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed
while the steering wheel is in the straightahead position.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4546
Front view
Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view
of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle
position and the predicted course to a parking space.
1 shows the position of the
The vehicle icon 䊊
vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view
may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
2
The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊
are indicated in black.
LHA4547
Rear view
2 is highlighted in
The non-viewable area 䊊
yellow for several seconds after the bird’seye view is displayed. It will be shown only the
first time after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
The driver can check the approximate direction and angle of the tire on the display by the
3 when driving the vehicle forward
tire icon 䊊
or backward.
4 indicate the predicPredictive course lines 䊊
tive course when operating the vehicle. The
predictive course lines will be displayed on
the monitor when the steering wheel is
turned. The predictive course lines will move
depending on how much the steering wheel is
turned and will not be displayed while the
steering wheel is in the neutral position.
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
When the monitor displays the front view and
the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
less from the neutral position, the two green
predictive course lines are shown in front of
the vehicle.
∙ A line on the ground may be misaligned
and is not seen as being straight at the
seam of the views. The misalignment will
increase as the line proceeds away from
the vehicle.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predictive course
line is shown in front of the vehicle and the
other predictive course line is shown at the
side of the vehicle.
∙ Tire angle display does not indicate the
actual tire angle.
When the monitor displays the rear view, the
predictive course lines are shown at back of
the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear
further than the actual distance.
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may
be misaligned or not displayed at the
seam of the views.
∙ Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations
on the ground are for approximate reference
only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in
the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or
park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
1 shows the front
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
part of the vehicle.
2 shows the apThe side-of-vehicle line 䊊
proximate vehicle width including the outside
mirrors.
3 of both the front 䊊
1 and
The extensions 䊊
2 lines are shown with a green dotted
side 䊊
line.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4216
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA4217
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1201
Backing up near a projecting object
A do not touch
The predicted course lines 䊊
the object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the actual
backing up course.
LHA4218
Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the object
the position 䊊
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
A if the
when backing up to the position 䊊
object projects over the actual backing up
course.
HOW TO PARK WITH
PREDICTED COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes
discharged, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following
procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
LHA1197
LHA1198
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for
more than 5 minutes.
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted
B enter the parking space
course lines 䊊
C.
䊊
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel
the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring
to the parking space 䊊
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA
button or move the
shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Around View® Monitor.
The Around View® Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the
button to switch between
CAMERA
the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
∙ Rear-wide view
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
∙ Front-wide view
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the
only available view is front view/front-side
view split screen.
The display will switch from the Around
View® Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
∙ A different screen is selected.
LHA4265
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SETTINGS
To set up the Around View® Monitor to your
preferred settings, press the SETTING button, select the “Camera/Sonar” key. For additional information about the sonar, refer to
“Camera aiding sonar (parking sensor)” in this
section. For information about the Display
screen adjustment, refer to “Adjusting the
screen” in this section.
Predicted Course Lines:
When this item is turned to ON, the predicted
course lines are displayed in the front view,
rear view and bird’s-eye view.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Moving Object Detection (MOD):
When this item is turned to ON, the MOD is
activated. When this item is turned to OFF
(indicator turns off), the MOD system is deactivated.
LHA4266
LHA4267
Camera View Priority:
MOD Volume:
The view shown on the screen at the beginning of the Around View® Monitor operation
can be selected in order of priority.
Adjusts the MOD volume between High, MID
or LOW by touching the “+” or “-” key on the
display screen. This feature is only available
when “Moving Object Detection” is on.
Non-viewable Area Reminder:
With this item turned to ON, the nonviewable area is highlighted in yellow for
seven seconds after the bird’s-eye view is
displayed. It will only be shown the first time
after the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
Automatic Display with Sonar:
When this item is turned to ON, the camera
view is automatically shown on the display in
the case that the distance to the objects
measured by the sonar is becoming short.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,
Contrast and Black Level of the Around
View® Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
LHA4268
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the
Around View® Monitor, press the SETTING
button with the monitor on. Select one of the
items and change the value by touching the
“+” or “-” key or by turning the INFINITI controller.
LHA4348
AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Do not use the Around View® Monitor
with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is
securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Around View® Monitor.
∙ The apparent distance between objects
viewed on the Around View® Monitor
differs from the actual distance.
∙ The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above the
rear license plate. Do not put anything on
the vehicle that covers the cameras.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause
a malfunction or cause damage resulting
in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will
not show objects and the system does not
warn of moving objects. When in the front or
rear view display, an object below the bum1 .
per or on the ground may not be viewed 䊊
When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near
2 of the camera viewing areas will
the seam 䊊
not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not display objects
clearly.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
∙ The colors of objects on the Around
View® Monitor may differ somewhat
from the actual color of objects.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Objects on the Around View® Monitor
may not be clear and the color of the
object may differ in a dark environment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the bird’seye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
LHA4270
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Around
View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
LHA4269
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiving
temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
LHA4347
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the Around View® Monitor may
cameras 䊊
not display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping
with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking
sensor) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar function as
outlined in this section could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The sonar is a convenience feature. It is
not a substitute for proper parking.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
∙ Always look around and check that it is
safe to move before parking.
∙ Read and understand the limitations of
the sonar as contained in this section.
The sonar function helps to inform the driver
of large stationary objects around the vehicle
when parking by issuing an audible and visual
alert.
LHA4455
SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Center display
2. CAMERA
button
3. SETTING button
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The system gives the tone for front objects
when the shift lever is in the “D” (Drive) position and both front and rear objects when the
shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position.
When the camera image is shown on the
center display, the system shows the sonar
indicator regardless of the shift lever position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
The colors of the sonar indicators and the
distance guide lines in the front, front-wide,
rear, and rear-wide views indicate different
distances to the object.
When the objects are detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking and the rate of the tone increase.
When the vehicle is very close to the object,
the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and
the tone sounds continuously.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an object is detected by only the
corner sonar and the distance does not
change.
The tone will stop when the object is no
longer near the vehicle.
LHA4272
TURNING ON AND OFF THE
SONAR FUNCTION
A is selected, the indiWhen the “
” key 䊊
B will turn off and the sonar will be
cator 䊊
turned off temporarily. The Moving Object
Detection (MOD) system will also be turned
off at the same time. For additional information, refer to “Moving Object Detection
” key
(MOD) in this section. When the “
A is selected again, the indicator will turn on
䊊
and the sonar will turn back on.
LHA4273
In the below cases, the sonar will be turned
back on automatically:
∙ When the shift lever is placed in the “R”
(Reverse) position.
button is
∙ When the CAMERA
pressed and a screen other than the camera view is shown on the display.
∙ When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
∙ When the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” position and turned back to the
“ON” position again. To prevent the sonar
system from activating altogether, use
the “Sonar” menu. For additional information, refer to “Sonar function settings”
in this section.
Sonar function settings
To set up the sonar function to your preferred
settings, press the SETTING button, select
the “Camera/Sonar” key and then select the
“Sonar” key on the center display.
Designs and items displayed on the screen
may vary depending on the models.
Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the
buzzer.
Sonar: When this item is turned on, the front
and rear sonar is activated. When this item is
turned off (indicator turns off), the front and
rear sonar is deactivated. The amber markers
are displayed at the corners of the vehicle
icon and the sonar icon will disappear from
” key on the Around View® Display.
the “
The next time the ignition switch is placed in
the on position, “sonar is OFF” is displayed
briefly.
FR sensor only: When this item is turned to
“ON”, only the front sonar sensors are active.
Interrupt Display: When this item is turned to
“ON” the display screen will interrupt the current view in the display to see the surrounding
area of the vehicle.
Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity level
of the sonar higher (right) or lower (left).
SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the sonar function. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources
such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic
drill may affect the function of the system, including reduced performance or a
false activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
∙ The system will not detect small objects
below the bumper, and may not detect
objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ The system may not detect the following
objects:
– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,
cotton, grass or wool.
– Thin objects such as rope, wire or
chain.
– Wedge-shaped objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of objects or false alarms.
CAUTION
Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
System temporarily unavailable
When the amber markers are displayed at the
corners of the vehicle icon and the function
cannot be activated from the Camera setting
menu (the setting items are grayed out), the
sonar system may be malfunctioning.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
Keep the surface of the sonar sensors (located on the front and rear bumper fascia)
free from accumulations of snow, ice and
dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sonar
sensors when cleaning. If the sensors are
covered, the accuracy of the sonar function
will be diminished.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION
(MOD) (if so equipped)
LHA4454
1. CAMERA
button
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving
Object Detection system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ The MOD system is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects
surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors
and rearview mirror and turn and check
the surroundings to ensure it is safe to
maneuver.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
∙ The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking
lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by
using image processing technology on the
image shown in the display.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
button is
∙ When the CAMERA
pressed to activate the camera view on
the display.
∙ When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the
camera screen is displayed.
LHA4274
Front and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is displayed:
∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the
stowed position, or if either front door is
opened.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
LHA4275
Front-wide view
∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the front view.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the rear view. The MOD system will not
operate if the liftgate is open.
LHA4276
Rear and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon
is not displayed on the screen when in this
view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be
displayed on the view where the objects are
detected. While the MOD system continues
to detect moving objects, the yellow frame
continues to be displayed.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4277
Rear and front-side views
NOTE:
While the BCI chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime.
1 is
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
displayed on each camera image (front, rear,
right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
2 is displayed on each
The yellow frame 䊊
view in the front view and rear view modes.
4. Touch “Moving Object Detection” to
switch between ON and OFF.
You can also turn MOD on and off by press4 on the display screen.
” key 䊊
ing the “
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
LHA4278
Rear-wide view
3 is displayed in the view
A blue MOD icon 䊊
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
3 is not displayed.
icon 䊊
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF
1. Press the SETTINGbutton on the control
panel
2. Touch the Camera/Sonar key
∙ Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function
properly.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will
interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
∙ The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
– When there is low contrast between
background and the moving objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present.
– When camera orientation is not in its
usual position, such as when a mirror is
folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
∙ The MOD system might detect flowing
water droplets on the camera lens, white
smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
∙ The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction,
distance or shape of the moving objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone
may be altered and the MOD system may
not detect objects properly.
∙ When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not display objects
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
3. Select Camera
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
NOTE:
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the MOD system may not opercameras 䊊
ate properly. Clean the camera by wiping
with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry
cloth.
The blue MOD icon will change to orange if
one of the following has occurred:
∙ When the system is malfunctioning.
∙ When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
∙ When the Rear View camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
LHA4347
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
VENTS
4 and
The vents underneath the first row 䊊
second row seats are operational when
or the
air flow mode is sethe
lected. These vents cannot be closed. For
additional information, refer to “Air flow control” in this section.
LHA2324
Adjust air flow direction for the center vents
1 , driver’s and passenger’s side vents 䊊
2 ,
䊊
3 by moving the vent slide
and rear vents 䊊
and/or vent assemblies.
Open or close the vents using the dial. Move
to open the vents or
the dial toward the
toward the
to close them.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Temperature control (decrease) button (passenger’s side)
DUAL button
Manual air flow control button
Temperature control (decrease) button (driver’s side)
Temperature control (increase)
button (driver’s side)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
LHA4250
1.
2.
6. AUTO climate control ON button
Front defroster button
7. REAR (ON-OFF) button
REAR window and outside
8.
Air recirculation button
mirror defroster switch
9. CLIMATE button
3. OFF button
10.
Temperature control (increase)
4.
(Fan speed) decrease button
button (passenger’s side)
5.
(Fan speed) increase button
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in
a closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit.
Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger
compartment. This should help reduce
odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, intake air control, and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and
AUTO will be displayed.)
2. Operate the driver’s side temperature
control buttons.
∙ The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, intake air control, and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the
front defroster button
on. (The indicator light on the button will
come on.)
2. Operate the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside of
fan speed
the windows, use the
control buttons to set the fan speed to
maximum.
front defroster button is
∙ When the
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so
equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is activated
depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control
display and buttons will be inoperable until
the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote
Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster and heated steering wheel (if
so equipped) may be activated automatically.
∙ As soon as possible after the windshield
is clean, press the AUTO button to return
to the automatic mode.
∙ Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Voice Recognition logic (if so
equipped)
When the climate control system is on, the
front and rear fan speeds may be automatically lowered so that commands are more
easily recognized. Fan speed can be adjusted
using the fan speed decrease and increase
buttons, if desired.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the
fan speed control buttons to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control
Press the temperature control buttons up or
down to set the desired temperature.
The temperature can be set within the following range:
∙ For U.S.: 60 to 90ºF (16 to 32ºC)
∙ For Canada: 64 to 90ºF (18 to 32ºC)
Air recirculation
Air flow control
Press the
air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
indicator light on the button will
The
come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front
defrosting mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F
(21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically
to reduce overall power consumption. To exit
air recirculation mode, deselect the air recirculation button (indicator will turn off) to enter fresh air mode.
Press the
button to manually control
air flow. Pressing the button repeatedly will
cycle through the available modes and display the corresponding icon on the center
display:
Automatic intake air control
Press the OFF button.
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control
air recirculation
the intake air, press the
button. To return to the automatic control
air recirculamode, press and hold the
tion button for about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash twice, and then the intake
air will be controlled automatically.
CLIMATE button
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
—
—
—
—
Air flows from center and side
vents.
Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
Air flows from defroster and
foot outlets.
To turn system off
Press the CLIMATE button on the control
panel to display the screen for front air conditioner operations.
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
∙ When the climate system is in automatic
operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are
low, the air flow outlet may default to
defroster mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will
return to foot mode and operation will
continue normally.
LHA2173
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature. Do
not put anything on or around this sensor.
∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
have selected and the outlets the air is
coming out do not match, select the
mode.
∙ When you change the air flow mode, you
may feel air flow from the feet vents for
just a moment. This is not a malfunction.
∙ When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. You may notice
air flow from the foot mode vent outlets
for a maximum of 15 seconds. This is not
a malfunction. After the initial warm air is
expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, air flow outlet will return to
previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate
control button.
∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)
closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
2. If the CLIMATE screen is displayed and
the A/C indicator is ON, press the softtouch A/C button to turn A/C OFF.
3. Press the temperature control button to
set the desired temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature or the system
may not work properly.
LHA4425
CLIMATE SETTING SCREEN
Climate control settings can be changed on
the screen.
Press the CLIMATE button on the control
panel and turn the display to the Climate
mode.
Heating (A/C off)
The air conditioner does not activate in this
mode. When you need to heat only, use this
mode.
1. Press the CLIMATE button.
∙ This procedure is not recommended if
windows fog up.
When the outside temperature decreases to
approximately 32°F (0°C), the A/C function
does not activate even if the “A/C” indicator
light illuminates.
Dual control mode setting
Press the DUAL button on the control panel
to activate dual climate control functions.
Or, you can individually set the driver and
front passenger side temperature using each
temperature control button.
1. Press the CLIMATE button.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
2. By touching the “DUAL” key, or when the
passenger side temperature control button or manual air control button is
pressed, the “DUAL” indicator on the
screen will illuminate.
3. To turn off the passenger side temperature control, touch the “DUAL” key and
the “DUAL” indicator will turn off.
∙ The Dual control mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode.
Advanced Climate Control System
(ACCS) (if so equipped)
The Advanced Climate Control System
(ACCS) keeps the air inside of the vehicle
clean, using the ion control and the automatic
air intake control with exhaust gas detecting
sensor.
The amount of Plasmacluster® ions increases according to the amount of air flow.
is displayed
When the air flow is high,
on the screen and when the air flow is low,
.
the indication in the screen changes to
Plasmacluster® and Plasmacluster® ion are
registered trademarks of Sharp Corporation.
Exhaust gas/outside odor detection sensor
(if so equipped)
LHA4508
Ion control (if so equipped)
This unit generates highly concentrated Plasmacluster® ions into the air blown from the
vents and reduces odor absorbed into the
interior trim.
When the air conditioner is turned on, the
system generates Plasmacluster® ions automatically.
When the automatic intake air control is ON,
for the first 5 minutes, the recirculation mode
is selected to prevent dust, dirt and pollen
from entering the vehicle and cleans the air
inside of the vehicle with positive and negative ions that are emitted from the vent.
After the 5 minutes, the sensor detects exhaust gas and automatically alternates between the recirculation mode and outside air
circulation mode.
This vehicle may be equipped with an exhaust
gas detection sensor. When the automatic
intake air control is ON, the sensor detects
industry odors such as pulp or chemicals, and
exhaust gas such as gasoline or diesel. When
such odors or gas are detected, the system
automatically changes from the outside air
circulation mode to the recirculation mode.
When the intake air control button is pressed
under the following conditions, the indicator
button will illuminate and
light on the
the exhaust gas detection sensor will turn on.
∙ The air flow control is not in the front
defroster mode (the indicator light on
front defroster button is turned
the
off).
∙ The outside temperature is about 32°F
(0°C) or more.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
5. CLIMATE button
(temperature) increase and decrease buttons (driver’s side)
To turn on/off the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner
control panel, press the REAR (ON-OFF)
button.
6.
The rear automatic air conditioning system
can be adjusted with the front air conditioner
control panel when the Rear Climate screen is
displayed.
To control the rear automatic air conditioning
system with the front air conditioner control
panel, press the CLIMATE button. When the
display shows front climate control, touch
the Rear Climate key on the screen.
Automatic operation
1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator light will illuminate in the Rear Climate display.
LHA4251
REAR AUTOMATIC AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1. OFF button
Front Controls
(fan speed) increase and decrease
2.
buttons
3. AUTO button
4. REAR (ON-OFF) button
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
2. Press the temperature increase and decrease buttons (driver’s side) to set the
desired temperature.
Manual operation
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Doing so
may cause the temperature to not be
controlled properly.
Turning the system off
∙ Temperature control
Press the temperature increase and decrease buttons (driver’s side) to set the
desired temperature.
1. Press the REAR (ON-OFF) button on
the front control panel and the indicator
light will turn off.
∙ Fan speed control
(fan speed) increase and
Press the
decrease buttons to manually control the
fan speed. Fan screen can also be controlled using the display screen. Touch
or
key to set the desired
the
fan speed.
2. Or, press the OFF button. The Rear Climate Controls will turn OFF.
Turning the system off using the display
screen
LHA4468
Rear Heating (A/C off)
1. To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, press the CLIMATE
button. When the display shows front
climate control, touch the Rear Climate
key displayed on the screen.
1. To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, press the CLIMATE
button. When the display shows front
climate control, touch the Rear Climate
key displayed on the screen.
ON/OFF key to turn
2. Touch the
off the rear controls using the Rear Climate display screen.
2. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator light will illuminate in the display.
Or, using the touch-screen display,
touch the right side arrow key to display
additional keys; touch the AUTO key on
the display and the feature will activate.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
∙ Fan speed increase and decrease buttons Adjusts the rear fan speed up or
down.
∙ AUTO button Turns rear automatic air
conditioning system on, AUTO mode on.
∙ Temperature increase and decrease buttons Adjusts the rear temperature up or
down.
LHA2134
Rear Controls
The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear
Rear control buttons
automatic air conditioning system using the
1. OFF button
control switches at the rear of the center
console.
(fan speed increase) button
2.
3. AUTO button
4.
(temperature increase) button
5.
(temperature decrease) button
6. Display
7. — (fan speed decrease) button
The rear control buttons do not function
when the Rear Climate screen is shown on
the front display. To activate the rear control
buttons, press the CLIMATE button and the
screen will return to Front Climate control.
This will enable the second row Rear Climate
controls.
∙ OFF button Turns rear automatic air
conditioning system off.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS (if so
equipped)
The air conditioner system in your INFINITI
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed
with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is
required when servicing your INFINITI air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to your
air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for servicing your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced
technician with proper equipment.
LHA4063
2nd row
There are USB/iPod® charging ports located
in the 2nd row on the back of the center
console and in the 3rd row located above the
cup holders. These ports will charge compatible devices.
LHA4064
3rd row
NOTE:
The USB/iPod® charging ports will not operate with the display screen or the Mobile
Entertainment System (MES) (if so
equipped). Only the USB connection port located in the console box will operate
USB/iPod® devices.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
ANTENNA
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna and an antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone
in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control
system and other electronic parts.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place metalized film near the rear
window glass or attach any metal parts
to it. This may cause poor reception or
noise.
∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage
the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe
along the antenna with a dampened soft
cloth.
WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle
is in motion, the hands free cellular phone
operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on the
phone, pull off the road to a safe location
and stop your vehicle.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible
from the electronic control modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information,, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for servicing.
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . .5-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving
safety precautions (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . .5-15
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
INFINITI Intelligent Key battery
discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 5-18
Driving the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . 5-19
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
INFINITI Drive Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Standard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Snow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
ECO mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-29
LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
LDP system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
How to enable/disable the LDP system . . . . . . 5-34
LDP system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-38
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-40
BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) (if so equipped) . . . 5-47
BSI system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
How to enable/disable the BSI system . . . . . . . 5-50
BSI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
BSI driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
BCI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Turning the BCI system on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
BCI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
System temporarily not available. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . . 5-68
RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . .5-71
RCTA system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-78
ICC system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
The ICC switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Operating ICC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Operating conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
ICC system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Distance Control Assist (DCA) (if so equipped) . . . 5-98
DCA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
How to enable/disable the DCA system. . . . . 5-101
DCA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
DCA driving situations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system (if so equipped) . . . 5-109
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Turning the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system ON/OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
PFCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Turning the PFCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
PFCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. . . . . . . . . 5-136
Active Trace Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-138
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) . . 5-140
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . 5-142
Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-145
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in
a closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It
can cause unconsciousness or death.
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows
fully open, and have the vehicle inspected
immediately.
5-4 Starting and driving
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger
compartment. If you must drive with one
of these open, follow these precautions:
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
air recirculation button
2. Set the
to off and the fan control dial to high
to circulate the air.
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are
burned at high temperatures to help reduce
pollutants.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the
seal on the liftgate or the body, follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation to
prevent carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle.
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
are very hot. Keep people, animals or
flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
1. Open all the windows.
∙ The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste
paper or rags. They may ignite and cause
a fire.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce
the three-way catalyst’s ability to help
reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions
in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical
systems can cause over rich fuel flow into
the three-way catalyst, causing it to
overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the vehicle
inspected promptly. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the threeway catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all four
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Starting and driving 5-5
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a flat tire while driving).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS
and turn off the low tire pressure warning
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check
the tire pressure.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information
display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning turns off when the low
tire pressure warning light turns off.
5-6 Starting and driving
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch
is in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate
a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Do not
reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving.
Low outside temperature can lower the
temperature of the air inside the tire
which can cause a lower tire inflation
pressure. This may cause the low tire
pressure warning light to illuminate. If the
warning light illuminates, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label is
located in the driver’s door opening.
∙ You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle
information display screen. The order of
the tire pressure figures displayed on the
screen corresponds with the actual order
of the tire position.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” and “Tire Pressure
Low — Add Air” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section for
changing a flat tire.)
∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is
mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire
sealant into the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with tire
chains or the wheels are buried in snow.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies
is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
INFINITI.
∙ Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.
This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and
the TPMS will not function properly.
Starting and driving 5-7
FCC Notice:
Vehicle set-up:
For USA:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device
TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the
TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator provides
visual and audible signals outside the vehicle
to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
5-8 Starting and driving
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
three times. To correct the pressure,
push the core of the valve stem on the
tire briefly to release pressure. When
the pressure reaches the designated
pressure, the horn beeps once.
∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates
that the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indi-
cator is not operating.
∙ The TPMS will not activate the TPMS
with Tire Inflation Indicator under the
following conditions:
– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor
is low.
∙ If the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator does not operate due to TPMS
interference, move the vehicle about
3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try
again.
If the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator is
not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and offroad applications. This gives them a higher
center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at
high speeds. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
safety precautions” in this section.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat
belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your
passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed
than a person properly wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If
this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note
that this procedure is only a general guide.
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate
based on the conditions of the vehicle, road
and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
Starting and driving 5-9
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return
to the road surface. When all tires are on
the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay
in the appropriate driving lane.
eral guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based
on vehicle, road or traffic conditions,
gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a
safe place off the road.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
WARNING
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the
direction of the flat tire.
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving on
under-inflated tires.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at
highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually
inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or
“blows-out” while driving, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure below.
Please note that this procedure is only a gen-
5-10 Starting and driving
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service to
change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS
AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being
involved in an accident injuring yourself and
others. Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the severity
of the injury.
INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
accidents. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
And that is true for drugs, too (over-thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery
surfaces may cause the AWD warning
message to display and the AWD system
to automatically switch from the AWD to
the 2WD mode. This could reduce the
traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (AWD models).
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle should
be seated with their seat belt fastened.
This will keep you and your passengers in
position when driving over rough terrain.
Your INFINITI is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
deep water or mud as your INFINITI is mainly
designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional
off-road vehicle.
∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead
drive either straight up or straight down
the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over
sideways much more easily than they can
forward or backward.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are
less capable than all-wheel drive (AWD)
models for rough road driving and extrication
when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.
∙ Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you may stall. If you
drive down them, you may not be able to
control your speed. If you drive across
them, you may roll over.
∙ Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an
accident.
∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot make it
to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to
turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll
over. Always back straight down in R
(Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.
∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed.
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be
thrown forward and cause injury to you
or your passengers.
∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as
far forward and as low as possible. Do not
equip the vehicle with tires larger than
specified in this manual. This could cause
your vehicle to roll over.
Starting and driving 5-11
∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly
and injure your hands. Instead drive with
your fingers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.
∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure that
the driver and all passengers have their
seat belts fastened.
∙ Always drive with the floor mats in place
as the floor may become hot.
∙ Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your INFINITI is more affected
by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD
engaged.
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any drive or
reverse position with the engine running.
Doing so may result in drivetrain damage
or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.
5-12 Starting and driving
∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to an
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel
excessively.
∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss
of control.
∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your
INFINITI vehicle has a higher center of
gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle
is not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in
loss of control and/or a rollover accident.
∙ Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the front
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
∙ Be sure to check the brakes immediately
after driving in mud or water. For additional information, refer to “Brake precautions” in this section.
∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills.
If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls
forward, backward or sideways, you
could be injured.
∙ Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel
hub, more frequent maintenance may be
required. For additional information, refer to “Maintenance under severe operating conditions” in the “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL
DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the front
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
∙ This vehicle is not designed for off-road
(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy or
muddy roads that tires may get stuck in.
∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in an
emergency. (The engine will stop when the
ignition switch is pushed three consecutive
times in quick succession or the ignition
switch is pushed and held for more than
2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a
crash and serious injury.
∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to an
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel
excessively.
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any D
(Drive) or R (Reverse) position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
Starting and driving 5-13
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is moved to the P
(Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be placed in
the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
LSD2014
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center:
∙ Once to change to ACC.
∙ Two times to change to ON.
∙ Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return
to the LOCK position when any door is either
opened or closed with the switch in the OFF
position.
5-14 Starting and driving
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the
ignition switch cannot be moved from the
LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation
are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
LSD2020
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to
push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start func1 .
tion is inside of the vehicle 䊊
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH POSITIONS
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not
running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position
after a period of time under the following
conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
LOCK (Normal parking position)
∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
placed in the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched
off.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will place
the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the
vehicle is not running, after some time under
the following conditions:
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the
ignition switch. If equipped, the ignition
switch heart beat function (pulsed illumination) may activate for a period of time when
any door is unlocked and when the door
opened/closed status changes in the OFF
and ACC positions.
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
Starting and driving 5-15
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following
procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
After Step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the
brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
change to ACC.
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE:
SSD0860
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start
the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
5-16 Starting and driving
∙ When the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator
appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key
battery discharge indicator, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent Key
again.
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery discharge
indicator appears, replace the battery as
soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING THE ENGINE
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will
not allow the engine to start without the use
of the registered key.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer
fluid as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
If the engine fails to start using the registered
key, it may be due to interference caused by
another registered key, an automated toll
road device or automated payment device on
the key ring. Restart the engine using the
following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
5 seconds.
3. Repeat Step 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI
recommends placing the registered key on a
separate key ring to avoid interference from
other devices.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
∙ Check that all doors are closed.
∙ Position
seat
and
restraints/headrests.
adjust
head
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers
to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition
switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal
a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)
and while holding, crank the engine.
Release the accelerator pedal when
the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to
the ON position to start cranking the
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition switch
to the LOCK position. After cranking
Starting and driving 5-17
the engine, release the accelerator
pedal. Crank the engine with your foot
off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the
ignition switch to start the engine. If
the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not
start, push the ignition switch to the OFF
position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be
damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at a
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
5-18 Starting and driving
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances. In
these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be placed
in the ON position before the shift lever can
be moved from the P (Park) position. To place
the ignition switch in the ON position, follow
these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, refer to “INFINITI
Intelligent Key” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M
(Manual shift mode). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed
up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)
position while the vehicle is reversing.
This could cause an accident or damage
the transmission.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,
when stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing
the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and
smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for
this transmission are shown on the following
pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically reduced
to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery
roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
This Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so that the foot brake
pedal must be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any driving position
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other positions if the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position while the ready light illuminates.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot
brake pedal and then gradually start the
vehicle in motion.
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M
(Manual shift mode). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
Starting and driving 5-19
WARNING
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed
up.
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property
damage.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)
position while the vehicle is reversing.
This could cause an accident or damage
the transmission.
CAUTION
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
only when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
LSD2358
CAUTION
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,
when stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
5-20 Starting and driving
Shifting
P (Park)
CAUTION
Press the button while depressing the
brake pedal
Press the button to shift
Shift without pressing the button
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal, press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever from the P (Park) position
to any of the desired shift positions.
To prevent transmission damage, use the P
(Park) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal must be depressed and the
shift lever button pressed to move the shift
lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position
to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When
parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first,
then move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R
(Reverse) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pressed to move the shift lever from
P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is in the manual shift
gate, the transmission is ready for the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected
manually by moving the shift lever up or
down. To cancel manual shift mode, return
the shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The
transmission returns to automatic driving
mode.
When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually. In the manual shift
mode, the shift range is displayed on the
position indicator in the meter. When shifting
the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the
position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to 7 (7th)
depending on vehicle speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7
7 (7th)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
6 (6th) and 5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long slopes,
or for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine
braking on downhill grades.
1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than
7th gear. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
∙ The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you
select the 3rd range, the transmission will
shift down between the 3rd and 1st
gears.)
∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position
to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.
Starting and driving 5-21
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance
and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.
5. Press the shift lever button and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock release.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired
location. Replace the removed shift lock
release cover after the operation.
∙ When this situation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light will blink and the
chime will sound.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P
(Park) position, have the Continuously Variable Transmission system checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the engine
speed is too high. When the vehicle
speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st
gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
Shift lock release
∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid temperature
is extremely low even if manual shift
mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up, manual
mode can be selected.
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift lever may not be moved from the P
(Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed. To
move the shift lever, perform the following
procedure:
∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,
the shift range may upshift in lower rpm
than usual. This is not a malfunction.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
2. Apply the parking brake.
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
LSD2360
3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a suitable tool.
5-22 Starting and driving
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position while the engine is running
and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop
lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop
lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
PARKING BRAKE
High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature
becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with
heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer),
engine power and, under some conditions,
vehicle speed will be decreased automatically
to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the
accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle
speed may be limited.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
Continuously Variable Transmission will not
be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and
subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate
the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait for
10 seconds. Then place the ignition switch
back in the ON position. The vehicle should
return to its normal operating condition. If it
does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and
repaired, if necessary. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The
reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance of a
collision. Be especially careful when driving.
If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a
safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.
WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released
before driving. Failure to do so can cause
brake failure and lead to an accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure the
parking brake is fully engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause
a significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
Starting and driving 5-23
INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR
STANDARD MODE
STANDARD MODE is recommended for
normal driving. Turn the Drive Mode Selector
switch to the center position. “STD” appears
in the vehicle information display for 2 seconds.
SPORT MODE
The SPORT mode adjusts the engine and
transmission to enhance performance. Turn
the Drive Mode Selector switch to the
SPORT position. “SPORT” appears in the vehicle information display for 2 seconds.
LSD2671
LSD0158
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Drive Mode Selector switch
Four driving modes can be selected by using
the Drive Mode Selector switch: STANDARD, SPORT, ECO and SNOW.
NOTE:
NOTE:
SNOW mode is used on snowy roads or slippery areas. When the SNOW mode is activated, engine output is controlled to avoid
wheel spin. Turn the SNOW mode off for
normal driving. Turn the Drive Mode Selector
switch to the SNOW position. “SNOW” appears in the vehicle information display for
2 seconds.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal
and it will release.
∙ When the Drive Mode Selector switch
selects a mode, the mode may not switch
quickly. This is not a malfunction.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.
∙ Select the STANDARD mode center for
normal driving.
5-24 Starting and driving
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
reduced.
SNOW MODE
ECO MODE
The ECO mode adjusts the engine and transmission to enhance fuel economy.
∙ When the vehicle speed is below 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) or over 90 mph (144 km/h).
∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control system (if so equipped) is operated.
NOTE:
ECO pedal system (if so equipped)
Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily
improve fuel economy as many driving factors influence its effectiveness.
The ECO pedal system helps assist the driver
to improve fuel economy by increasing the
reaction force of the accelerator pedal. When
the ECO drive indicator light is blinking or
turns off, the ECO pedal system increases
the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.
Operation
Turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the
ECO position. “ECO” appears in the vehicle
information display for 2 seconds and the
ECO drive indicator light illuminates on the
instrument panel.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
within the range of economy drive, the ECO
drive indicator light illuminates in green.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
above the range of economy drive, the color
of the ECO drive indicator light changes to
orange. For ECO pedal system equipped
models, refer to “ECO pedal system” in this
section.
The ECO drive indicator light will not illuminate in the following cases:
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in
green, the accelerator reaction force is normal. When the ECO drive indicator light is
blinking or turns off, the ECO pedal system
increases the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.
The ECO pedal system may not vary accelerator reaction force under the following
conditions:
∙ When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
or R (Reverse) position.
∙ When Intelligent Cruise Control (if so
equipped) is being operated.
ECO drive indicator
Illuminates
(green)
Blinks
(green)
Illuminates or
blinks when
When the pedal
is depressed
within range of
economy drive
When the pedal
is depressed
likely over the
range of
economy drive
If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically. The ECO pedal system
will not vary the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.
When the Drive Mode Selector switch is rotated from the ECO mode to another mode
(STANDARD, SPORT or SNOW) while the
ECO pedal system is operating, the ECO
pedal system continues to operate until the
pedal is released.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly,
the ECO pedal system will not increase the
reaction force of the acceleration pedal. The
ECO pedal system is not designed to prevent
the vehicle from accelerating.
Starting and driving 5-25
Adjusting the ECO pedal system reaction
force
The ECO pedal system reaction force can be
adjusted. The reaction force setting will be
maintained until the setting is changed even if
the engine is turned off.
LSD2672
LSD2695
Setting ECO pedal reaction force
1 button and select
1. Press the SETTING 䊊
“Drive Mode Enhancement” on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then
2 button.
press the ENTER 䊊
2 button and select
2. Press the ENTER 䊊
“ECO Pedal OFF” on the display. Use the
INFINITI controller to select “OFF” or
“Soft” or “Standard” in the display. Then
2 button. When the
press the ENTER 䊊
ECO pedal system is turned off, the accelerator will operate normally.
5-26 Starting and driving
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
(if so equipped)
The LDW system monitors the lane markers
1
on the traveling lane using the camera unit 䊊
located above the inside mirror. When the
camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of the
traveling lane, the LDW indicator light on the
instrument panel blinks in orange and a warning chime sounds.
LSD2696
LSD2701
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system
could result in serious injury or death.
The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
45 mph (70 km/h) and above, and only when
the lane markings are clearly visible on the
road.
The LDW system warns the driver with a
warning indicator in the vehicle information
display and chime that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane.
Starting and driving 5-27
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane departure
warning function when the vehicle is driven at
speeds of approximately 45 mph (70 km/h) and
above and the lane markings are clear. When
the vehicle approaches either the left or the
right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime
will sound and the LDW indicator light on the
instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
The LDW system is not designed to warn
under the following conditions:
∙ When you operate the lane change signal
and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will
become operable again approximately
2 seconds after the lane change signal is
turned off.)
∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
∙ When the BSI activates an audible warning or when the brakes are automatically
applied by the system.
LSD2771
5-28 Starting and driving
After the above conditions have finished and
the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDW SYSTEM
When the LDW system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be
turned off temporarily by pushing the warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system:
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. To set the LDW system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the ENTER button to select or change an item:
∙ Select “Lane” and press the ENTER
button.
– To turn on the warning, use the ENTER button to check box for “Lane.”
LSD2551
Starting and driving 5-29
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the LDW system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper use of
the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ This system is only a warning device to
inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer
the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is
the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
∙ The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 45 mph (70 km/h) or
if it cannot detect lane markers.
∙ If the LDW system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically, and “Malfunction:
See Owner’s Manual” will appear in the
vehicle information display. If "Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” appears in the
vehicle information display, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch in the
OFF position and restart the engine. If
“Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
– When you are towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
The system may not function properly under
the following conditions:
∙ Do not use the LDW system under the
following conditions as it may not function properly:
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the lane
width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear, low
tire pressure, installation of spare tire,
tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
– When driving on slippery roads, such
as on ice or snow.
∙ On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are
faded or not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-standard lane
markers; or lane markers covered with
water, dirt, snow, etc.
– When driving on winding or uneven
roads.
∙ On roads where the discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.).
∙ On roads where there are sharp curves.
5-30 Starting and driving
∙ On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system
could detect these items as lane markers.)
∙ On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
∙ When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane marker.
∙ When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
∙ When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres
to the windshield in front of the lane
camera unit.
∙ When the headlights are not bright due to
dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not
adjusted properly.
∙ When strong light enters the lane camera
unit. (For example, the light directly
shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
∙ When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under
high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the
LDW system may be deactivated automatically, the warning systems ON indicator on
the switch will flash and the following message will appear in the vehicle information
display: “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.”
When the interior temperature is reduced, the
LDW system will resume operating automatically and the warning systems ON indicator will stop flashing.
LIC3638
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the LDW system
The lane camera unit 䊊
is located behind the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of the LDW system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
Starting and driving 5-31
LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION
(LDP) (if so equipped)
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability
of detecting the lane markers.
The LDP system warns the driver with a
warning indicator in the vehicle information
display and chime, and helps assist the driver
to return the vehicle to the center of the
traveling lane by applying the brakes to the
left or right wheels individually (for a short
period of time).
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the camera unit. Do not touch the camera
lens or remove the screw located on the
camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
LSD2701
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDP system
could result in serious injury or death.
The LDP system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately
45 mph (70 km/h) and above, and only when
the lane markings are clearly visible on the
road.
5-32 Starting and driving
The LDP system monitors the lane markers
1
on the traveling lane using the camera unit 䊊
located above the inside mirror. When the
camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of the
traveling lane, the Lane Departure Warning
indicator light on the instrument panel blinks
in orange and a warning chime sounds. When
the LDP system is on, it will automatically
apply the brakes for a short period of time,
using the function of the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system.
LDP SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDP system operates above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). When the vehicle
approaches either the left or the right side of
the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound
and the LDW indicator light (orange) on the
instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
Then, the LDP system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to
help assist the driver to return the vehicle to
the center of the traveling lane.
To turn on the LDP system, push the dynamic
driver assistance switch on the steering
wheel after starting the engine. The LDW
indicator light (green) on the instrument panel
will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn off the LDP system. The LDW indicator light will turn off.
LSD2771
Starting and driving 5-33
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDP SYSTEM
When the LDP system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be
turned off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDP system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. To set the LDP system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the ENTER button to select or change an item:
∙ Select “Lane” and press the ENTER
button.
– To turn on the assistance system, use
the ENTER button to check box for
“Assistance (LDP).”
LSD2549
5-34 Starting and driving
LDP SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the LDP system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the
LDP system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The LDP system will not steer the vehicle
or prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ The LDP system is primarily intended for
use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers
in certain roads, weather or driving
conditions.
∙ The LDP system may activate if you
change lanes without first activating
your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an
existing lane marker. If this occurs you
may need to apply corrective steering to
complete your lane change.
∙ Because the LDP may not activate under
the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may
not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to
apply corrective steering.
∙ When the LDP system is operating, avoid
excessive or sudden steering maneuvers.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the
vehicle.
∙ The LDP system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 45 mph
(70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
∙ Do not use the LDP system under the following conditions as it may not function
properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads, such
as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or uneven
roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the lane
width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear, low
tire pressure, installation of spare tire,
tire chains, non-standard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
nonoriginal brake parts or suspension
parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
∙ If the LDP system malfunctions, it will
cancel automatically. The LDP indicator
(orange) will illuminate and the “Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual” warning
message will appear in the display.
∙ If the LDP indicator (orange) illuminates
in the display, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle. Turn the
engine off and restart the engine. If the
LDP indicator (orange) continues to illuminate, have the LDP system checked. It
is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-35
The LDP system may or may not operate
properly under the following conditions:
∙ On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are
faded or not painted clearly; yellow
painted lane markers; non-standard lane
markers; or lane markers covered with
water, dirt, snow, etc.
∙ On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
∙ On roads where there are sharp curves.
∙ On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow,
water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDP system
could detect these items as lane
markers.)
∙ When the headlights are not bright due
to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not
adjusted properly.
∙ When strong light enters the lane camera
unit. (For example, the light directly
shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
∙ When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
While the LDP system is operating, you may
hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the LDP system is
operating properly.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
∙ On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
Condition A:
∙ When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane marker.
The warning and assist functions of the LDP
system are not designed to work under the
following conditions:
∙ When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
∙ When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
5-36 Starting and driving
∙ When you operate the lane change signal
and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDP system will
be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is
turned off.)
∙ When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and
the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will
resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the LDP system is not
designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional):
∙ When the brake pedal is depressed.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary for the vehicle to change
lanes.
∙ When the vehicle is accelerated during
LDP system operation.
∙ When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
approach warning occurs.
∙ When the hazard warning flashers are
operated.
∙ When driving on a curve at high speed.
After the above conditions have finished and
the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDP system application of the
brakes will resume.
Condition C:
If the following messages appear in the vehicle
information display, a chime will sound and the
LDP system will be turned off automatically:
∙ “Unavailable: Road is slippery”:
When the VDC system (except Traction
Control System (TCS) function) or ABS
operates.
∙ “Unavailable: VDC OFF”:
When the VDC system is turned off.
∙ “Unavailable: Snow mode active”:
When the Drive Mode Selector switch is
turned to the SNOW mode.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic
driver assistance switch again to turn the
LDP system back on.
Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under
high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the LDP system is turned on, the LDP system may be
deactivated automatically and the following
message will appear on the vehicle information display: “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.”
When the interior temperature is reduced, the
system will resume operating automatically.
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability
of detecting the lane markers.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the camera unit. Do not touch the camera
lens or remove the screw located on the
camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
LIC3638
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the LDP system
The lane camera unit 䊊
is located behind the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of the LDP system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the windshield clean.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
Starting and driving 5-37
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles
or objects. When changing lanes, always
use the side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move to ensure it is safe to change lanes.
Never rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
5-38 Starting and driving
LSD2221
The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other
vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection
zone shown as illustrated. This detection
zone starts from the outside mirror of your
vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft
(3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica1 illuminates. If the turn signal is
tor light 䊊
then activated, the system chimes (twice) and
the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
The BSW indicator light continues to flash
until the detected vehicle leaves the detection
zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal, then
only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For additional
information, refer to “BSW driving situations”
in this section.
LSD2631
Starting and driving 5-39
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
When the BSW system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be
turned off temporarily by pushing the warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
4. Select “Blind Spot” and use the ENTER
button to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
LSD2816
5-40 Starting and driving
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings
even if the engine is restarted.
∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is
not a separate selection in the vehicle
information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the
RCTA system is also disabled.
∙ When the BSW system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection
zone when you accelerate from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore
most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and
parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation
condition.
∙ The following conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes
rapidly.
– Severe weather
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
– When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width.
When driving in a wider lane, the radar
sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow
lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
– Road spray
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will
interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
Starting and driving 5-41
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator
flashing
LSD2300
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn
signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and
the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles
which are approaching rapidly from behind.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before
a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.
5-42 Starting and driving
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone,
the side indicator light will flash but no
chime will sound when the other vehicle
is detected.
LSD2302
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.
LSD2303
Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling
close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed
quickly.
Starting and driving 5-43
∙ The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle when it enters the
detection zone.
LSD2305
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone
from either side.
LSD2308
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone,
the side indicator light will flash but no
chime will sound when the other vehicle
is detected.
5-44 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system
will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning
message will appear and the BSW/RCTA inA in the vehicle indicator (white) will blink 䊊
formation display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog. The blocked condition
may also be caused by objects such as ice,
frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2634
Starting and driving 5-45
Malfunction
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Radio frequency statement
Action to take:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. (FCC Number UR8100261)
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
For USA
LSD2221
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
5-46 Starting and driving
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
The manufacturer is not responsible for any
radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION® (BSI)
(if so equipped)
For Canada
WARNING
This device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Frequency
24,25GHz
of
operation:
24,05GHz
—
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m
peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
Ce produit est en conformité avec le Standard Industrie Canada RSS-310.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
Il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
Fréquence
24,25GHz
d’opération
:
24,05GHZ
-
Puissance du champ électrique: Pas plus de
2,5V/m pique (0,25V/m moyenne) à une distance de 3m.
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSI system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BSI system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles
or objects. When changing lanes, always
use the side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSI system.
∙ There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Not
every moving object or vehicle will be detected. Using the BSI system under some
road, ground, lane marker, traffic or
weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on
your own operation to avoid accidents.
LSD2153
1 installed
The BSI system uses a camera 䊊
behind the windshield to monitor the lane
markers of your traveling lane and radar sen2 installed near the rear bumper to
sors 䊊
detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
∙ The BSI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
The BSI system can help alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
Starting and driving 5-47
SSD1030
Detection zone
The BSI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). If the system detects a vehicle in the detection zone and your
vehicle is approaching the lane marker, the
BSI system provides an audible warning
(three times), flashes the BSW indicator light
and slightly applies the brakes for a short
period of time on one side to help return the
vehicle back to the traveling lane. The BSI
system provides an audible warning and
turns on or flashes the BSW indicator light
even if the BSW system is off.
LSD2634
5-48 Starting and driving
BSI SYSTEM OPERATION
If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the
detection zone, the BSW indicator light located near the outside mirrors illuminates. If
your vehicle is approaching a lane marker, the
system chimes a sound (three times) and the
BSW indicator light flashes. Then the system
applies the brakes on one side of the vehicle
for a moment to help return the vehicle back
to the center of the lane. BSI operates regardless of turn signal usage.
The BSI system turns on when the dynamic
driver assistance switch on the steering
wheel is pushed when the “Blind Spot Intervention” is enabled in the “Driver Assistance”
menu on the vehicle information display. The
BSI ON indicator light on the instrument
panel illuminates when the BSI system is
turned on.
The BSI system provides a chime and turns on
or flashes the BSW indicator light even if the
BSW system is off.
NOTE:
Warning and brake control will only be activated if the BSW indicator light is already
illuminated when your vehicle approaches a
lane marker. If another vehicle comes into
the detection zone after your vehicle has
crossed a lane marker, no warning or brake
control will be activated. For additional information, refer to “BSI driving situations”
in this section. The BSI system is typically
activated earlier than the Lane Departure
Prevention (LDP) system when your vehicle
is approaching a lane marker.
Starting and driving 5-49
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSI SYSTEM
When the BSI system is enabled in the vehicle
information display, the system can be turned
off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver
assistance switch on the steering wheel.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSI system:
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display.
button to select “Driver AsUse the
sistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. To set the BSI system to on or off, use
buttons to navigate in the
the
menu and use the ENTER button to select or change an item:
∙ Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER button.
– To turn on the assistance system, use
the ENTER button to check box for
“Assistance (BSI)”
LSD2547
5-50 Starting and driving
– Select “Brightness” and use the ENTER button to toggle through the
brightness
choices
—
“Bright/STD/Dark”
BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BSI system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSI when certain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, or animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection
zone when you accelerate from a stop.
For additional information, refer to
“BSI driving situations” in this section.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “BSI driving situations” in this section.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind. For additional information,
refer to “BSI driving situations” in this
section.
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes
rapidly. For additional information,
refer to “BSI driving situations” in this
section.
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width.
When driving in a wider lane, the radar
sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow
lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore
most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and
parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal driving condition.
∙ Severe weather or road spray conditions
may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
∙ The camera may not detect lane markers
in the following situations and the BSI
system may not operate properly.
– On roads where there are multiple
parallel lane markers; lane markers
that are faded or not painted clearly;
yellow painted lane markers; nonstandard lane markers; lane markers
covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
– On roads where discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp
curves.
– On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows,
snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or
lines remaining after road repairs.
– On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane markers.
– When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the lane
camera unit detection range.
Starting and driving 5-51
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the
windshield in front of a lane camera
unit.
– When the headlights are not bright
due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is
not adjusted properly.
– When strong light enters a lane camera unit. (For example: light directly
shines on the front of the vehicle at
sunrise or sunset.)
– When a sudden change in brightness
occurs. (For example: when the vehicle
enters or exits a tunnel or under a
bridge.)
∙ Do not use the BSI system under the following conditions because the system
may not function properly.
– During bad weather (for example:
rain, fog, snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads, such
as on ice or snow, etc.
– When driving on winding or uneven
roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When driving in a makeshift lane.
5-52 Starting and driving
– When driving on roads where the lane
width is too narrow.
– When driving with a tire that is not
within normal tire conditions (e.g. tire
wear, low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard
wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
∙ Do not use the BSI systems when towing
a trailer.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
SSD1026
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS
Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The Blind Spot Warning indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the
detection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling
much faster than your vehicle, the indicator
light may not illuminate before the detected
vehicle is beside your vehicle. Always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is
safe to change lanes.
SSD1031
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn
signal then the system chimes a sound (twice)
and the Blind Spot Warning indicator light
flashes.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal before
a vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.
LSD2048
Illustration 3 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 3: If the BSI system is on and your
vehicle is approaching a lane marker and a
vehicle is in the detection zone, the system
chimes a sound (three times), and the BSW
indicator light flashes. Then the BSI system
slightly applies the brakes on one side to help
return the vehicle back to the center of the
driving lane.
Starting and driving 5-53
SSD1032
Illustration 4 – Accelerate from a stop
NOTE:
Illustration 4: If you accelerate from a stop
with a vehicle in the detection zone, the
other vehicle may not be detected.
SSD1033
Illustration 5 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 5: The BSW indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.
The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
5-54 Starting and driving
SSD1034
Illustration 6 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes a sound (twice)
and the BSW indicator light flashes.
LSD2072
Illustration 7 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 7: If the BSI system is on and your
vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone the system chimes a sound (three times) and the
BSW indicator light flashes. Then, the BSI
system slightly applies the brakes on the appropriate side to help return the vehicle back
to the center of the driving lane.
SSD1036
Illustration 8 – Overtaking several vehicles
NOTE:
Illustration 8: When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
Starting and driving 5-55
LSD2050
Illustration 9 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 9: The BSW indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone
from either side.
NOTE:
The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle
which is traveling at about the same speed as
your vehicle when it enters the detection
zone.
5-56 Starting and driving
SSD1038
Illustration 10 – Entering from the side
Illustration 10: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the BSW indicator light flashes
and a chime will sound twice.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal before
a vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when another vehicle is detected.
SSD1094
Illustration 11 – Entering from the side
Illustration 11: If the BSI system is on and
your vehicle approaches the lane marker
while another vehicle is in the detection zone,
the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime
will sound three times. Then, the BSI system
slightly applies the brakes on the appropriate
side to help return the vehicle back to the
center of the driving lane.
– When steering quickly.
– When the ICC, DCA, PFCW or FEB
with Pedestrian Detection warnings
sound.
– When the hazard warning flashers
are operated.
– When driving on a curve at a high
speed.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
LSD2051
Illustration 12 – Entering from the side
NOTE:
∙ Illustration 12: The BSI system will not
operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker
when another vehicle enters the detection zone. In this case, only the BSW system operates.
∙ BSI braking will not operate or will stop
operating and only a warning chime will
sound under the following conditions:
– When the brake pedal is depressed.
When any of the following messages appear
on the vehicle information display, a chime
will sound and the BSI system will be turned
off automatically.
∙ “Unavailable: Road is slippery”:
When the VDC system (except traction
control system function) or ABS operates.
∙ “Unavailable: High Cabin Temp.”:
When the camera detects that the interior temperature is high (over approximately 104°F [40°C]).
∙ “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”:
When side radar blockage is detected.
Turn off the BSI system and turn it on again
when the above conditions no longer exist.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the BSI system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will sound
and the BSI system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning
light (orange) continues to illuminate, have
the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ “Unavailable: VDC OFF”:
When the VDC system is turned off.
∙ “Unavailable: Snow mode active”:
When the drive mode select switch is
turned to the SNOW mode.
– When the vehicle is accelerated during BSI system operation.
Starting and driving 5-57
LSD2153
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSI system is
The lane camera unit 䊊
located above the inside mirror. The two ra2 for the BSI system are located
dar sensors 䊊
near the rear bumper. To keep the proper
operation of the BSI system and prevent a
system malfunction, be sure to observe the
following:
∙ Always keep the windshield and the area
near the radar sensors clean.
5-58 Starting and driving
∙ The radar sensors may be blocked by
temporary ambient conditions such as
splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked
condition may also be caused by objects
such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the camera
unit or radar sensors.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any
radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability
of detecting the lane markers.
∙ Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on
the camera unit. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer if the camera
unit and/or area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
NOTE:
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Frequency
24,25GHz
of
operation:
24,05GHz
—
For USA
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m
peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. (FCC Number UR8100261)
Ce produit est en conformité avec le Standard Industrie Canada RSS-310.
BACKUP COLLISION INTERVENTION
(BCI) (if so equipped)
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
Il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
Fréquence
24,25GHz
d’opération
:
24,05GHZ
∙ There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Using
the BCI systems under some road,
ground, lane marker, traffic or weather
conditions could lead to improper system
operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
-
The BCI system can help alert the driver of an
approaching vehicle or objects behind the vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.
Puissance du champ électrique: Pas plus de
2,5V/m pique (0,25V/m moyenne) à une distance de 3m.
LSD2025
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approximately
5 mph (8 km/h), the BCI system operates.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BCI system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BCI system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedure, is not designed
to prevent contact with vehicles or objects and does not provide full brake
power. When backing out of a parking
space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you
will move. Never rely solely on the BCI
system.
Starting and driving 5-59
LSD2026
LSD2042
1 detect an approaching
The radar sensors 䊊
vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft (15 m)
2 detect stationary
away. The sonar sensors 䊊
objects behind the vehicle up to approxi3 .
mately 4.9 ft (1.5 m) 䊊
If the radar detects a vehicle approaching
from the side or the sonar detects close stationary objects behind the vehicle, the system
gives visual and audible warnings. If the driver
does not apply the brakes, the system automatically applies the brake for a moment
when the vehicle is moving backwards. After
the automatic brake application, the driver
must depress the brake pedal to maintain
brake pressure. If the driver’s foot is on the
accelerator pedal, the system pushes the accelerator upward before applying the brake.
If you continue to press the accelerator, the
system will not engage the brake.
1 inThe BCI system uses radar sensors 䊊
stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to
detect an approaching vehicle and sonar sensors to detect objects in the rear.
5-60 Starting and driving
BCI SYSTEM OPERATION
When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position, the BCI ON appears in the
vehicle information display.
LSD2589
Starting and driving 5-61
LSD2043
LSD2709
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from the side, the system chimes a sound
(single beep), the Blind Spot Warning indicator light on the side of the approaching vehicle flashes and a yellow rectangular frame
A.
appears in the display 䊊
Illustration 1
NOTE:
∙ In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime
may not be sounded by the BCI system
after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
LSD2044
Illustration 2
∙ The sonar system chime indicating there is
an object behind the vehicle has a higher
priority than the BCI chime (single beep)
indicating an approaching vehicle. If the
sonar system detects an object behind the
vehicle and the BCI system detects an approaching vehicle at the same time the following indicators are provided:
– The sonar system chime sounds
– The Blind Spot Warning indicator
light on the side of the approaching
vehicle flashes and
5-62 Starting and driving
– A yellow rectangular frame appears
in the display
If an approaching vehicle or object behind the
vehicle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, a red frame will appear in the display
A and the system will chime three times.
䊊
Then, the brakes will be applied momentarily.
After the automatic brake application, the
driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal,
the system moves the accelerator pedal upward before the braking is applied. However,
if you continue to accelerate, the system will
not engage the brakes.
LSD2709
The system does not operate if the object is
very close to the bumper.
Starting and driving 5-63
TURNING THE BCI SYSTEM
ON/OFF
The BCI system automatically turns on every
time the engine is started.
The BCI system can be turned off temporarily
by pushing the BCI switch. The BCI OFF
message appears on the vehicle information
display. When the shift lever is placed in the R
(Reverse) position again the BCI system is
turned on.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BCI system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disto select “Driver Asplay. Use the
sistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Back-up Collision Interv.”, and
press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Ignition On Status” and press
ENTER.
LSD2589
5-64 Starting and driving
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BCI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the
BCI system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn to
check what is behind you before backing
up. The radar sensors detect approaching
(moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 15 mph
(24 km/h)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
LSD2173
BCI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked
next to you obstructs the beam of the
radar sensor.
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
Starting and driving 5-65
– Illustration d: When an approaching
vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
– Thin objects such as rope, wire and
chain, etc.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY NOT
AVAILABLE
– Illustration e: When the angle formed
by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
∙ The brake engagement by the BCI system
is not as effective on a slope as it is on flat
ground. When on a steep slope the system may not function properly.
If the following messages appear on the vehicle information display, a chime will sound
and the BCI system will be turned off automatically:
∙ The following conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
∙ Do not use the BCI system under the following conditions because the system
may not function properly:
– When driving with a tire that is not
within normal tire conditions (e.g. tire
wear, low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, non-standard
wheels).
∙ “Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp.”:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then
started, the BCI system may be deactivated automatically and the “Unavailable:
High Accelerator Temp” message will appear in the vehicle information display for
a period of time.
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
When the interior temperature is reduced, turn off the BCI system and turn it
on again.
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt build up on the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
∙ The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle. The sonar sensor
may not detect:
– Small or moving objects
– Wedge-shaped objects
– Objects close to the bumper (less than
approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
5-66 Starting and driving
∙ Do not use the BCI system when towing a
trailer.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
∙ “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”:
When side radar blockage is detected.
When the blockage is removed, turn off
the BCI system and turn it on again.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
If the BCI system malfunctions, it will turn off
automatically, a chime will sound and the BCI
system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the
engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light (orange) continues to illuminate,
have the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
For USA
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. (FCC Number UR8100261)
LSD2025
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 and the sonar sensors
The radar sensors 䊊
2 for the BCI system are located near the
䊊
rear bumper. Always keep the area near the
radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
The manufacturer is not responsible for any
radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-67
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
(RCTA) (if so equipped)
For Canada
WARNING
This device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Frequency
24,25GHz
of
operation:
24,05GHz
—
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m
peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
Ce produit est en conformité avec le Standard Industrie Canada RSS-310.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
Il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
Fréquence
24,25GHz
d’opération
:
24,05GHZ
-
Puissance du champ électrique: Pas plus de
2,5V/m pique (0,25V/m moyenne) à une distance de 3m.
5-68 Starting and driving
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not
designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a
parking space, always use the side and
rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely
solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to
detect other vehicles approaching from the
right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of
an approaching vehicle when the driver is
backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approximately
5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching
from.
LSD2585
Starting and driving 5-69
LSD2216
1 inThe RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to
detect an approaching vehicle.
1 can detect an apThe radar sensors 䊊
proaching vehicle from up to approximately
66 ft (20 m) away.
5-70 Starting and driving
LSD2221
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
When the RCTA system is enabled in the
vehicle information display, the system can
be turned off temporarily by pushing the
warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems switch” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
4. Select “Blind Spot” and use the ENTER
button to turn the system on or off.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.
LSD2816
Starting and driving 5-71
NOTE:
∙ The RCTA system is integrated into the
BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display
for the RCTA system. When the BSW is
disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained even
if the engine is restarted.
LSD2173
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
5-72 Starting and driving
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the RCTA system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn to
check what is behind you before backing
up. The radar sensors detect approaching
(moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked
next to you obstructs the beam of the
radar sensor.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration d: When an approaching
vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle formed
by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
∙ The following conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
LSD2043
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the
ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
Illustration 1
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in
a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be
sounded by the RCTA system after the first
vehicle passes the sensors.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be
heard.
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
Starting and driving 5-73
LSD2044
Illustration 2
LSD2634
5-74 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system
will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction” warning
message will appear and the BSW/RCTA inA in the vehicle indicator (white) will blink 䊊
formation display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA
indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle
information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
LSD2221
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar
sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-75
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
For USA
Frequency
24,25GHz
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. (FCC Number UR8100261)
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m
peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Ce produit est en conformité avec le Standard Industrie Canada RSS-310.
NOTE:
The manufacturer is not responsible for any
radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-76 Starting and driving
of
operation:
24,05GHz
—
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
Il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
Fréquence
24,25GHz
d’opération
:
24,05GHZ
-
Puissance du champ électrique: Pas plus de
2,5V/m pique (0,25V/m moyenne) à une distance de 3m.
SSD0941
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. ACCEL/RES switch
2. COAST/SET switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions,
it will cancel automatically. The SET indicator in the vehicle information display
will blink to warn the driver.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control
system will be canceled automatically.
∙ If the SET indicator blinks, turn the
ON/OFF switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ The SET indicator may sometimes blink
when the ON/OFF switch is turned on
while
pushing
the
ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET or CANCEL switch. To
properly set the cruise control system,
perform the steps below.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the vehicle
at a set speed
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed
∙ On winding or hilly roads
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
∙ In very windy areas
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator
light in the vehicle information display will
illuminate.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator
light goes out.
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the vehicle information display go
out.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. The SET indicator light
in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
The cruise control is automatically canceled
and the SET light in the vehicle information
display goes out if:
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
∙ You depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, drive without the cruise
control.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
Starting and driving 5-77
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL
(ICC) (if so equipped)
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could
result in serious injury or death.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits and
do not set the speed over them.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To
avoid serious injury or death, do not rely
on the system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in emergency
situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic
conditions.
LSD2702
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
A loThe ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊
cated on the front of the vehicle to detect
vehicles traveling ahead.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the
vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
5-78 Starting and driving
ICC SYSTEM OPERATION
The ICC system maintains a selected distance
from the vehicle in front of you within the
speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up
to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph
(32 to 144 km/h), based on road conditions.
The vehicle travels at the set speed when the
road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is designed to maintain a
selected distance from the vehicle in front of
you and can reduce the speed to match a
slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power.
LSD2610
This system should only be used when traffic
conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain
fairly constant or when vehicle speeds
change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the
traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling
ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because
the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle
quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system
Starting and driving 5-79
will sound a warning chime and blink the
system display to notify the driver to take
necessary action.
For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.
The following items are controlled in the ICC
system:
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must
pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead
when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the ICC system maintains the
speed set by the driver. The set speed
range is between approximately 20 and
90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the ICC system adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will
cancel once it judges a standstill with a
warning chime.
∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the ICC
system accelerates and maintains vehicle
speed up to the set speed.
5-80 Starting and driving
SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
to maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the
ICC system will accelerate and maintain the
speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to
the driving operation to maintain control of
the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to a
vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate
your vehicle when acceleration is required for
a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when
deceleration is required to maintain a safe
distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay
alert when using the ICC system.
ICC (Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control) mode
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle
traveling in front of you according to that
vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at the
set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle
traveling in the same lane and direction.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the
vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if
necessary. The detection range of the sensor
is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.
Preview Function
The ICC system with the Preview Function
identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle ahead in the same
lane, and the distance and relative speed
from it. The system applies the brake prepressure before the driver depresses the
brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.
∙ This system will not operate when the
vehicle is moving at approximately
20 mph (32 km/h) or less.
∙ The pre-pressure function ceases when
the following conditions are met:
– When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
– If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
SSD0338
∙ The sensor will not detect:
– Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
– Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
– Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane as illustrated
WARNING
∙ This system is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
Starting and driving 5-81
∙ As there is a performance limit to the Preview Function, never rely solely on this
system. This system does not correct
careless, inattentive or absentminded
driving, or overcome poor visibility in
rain, fog, or other bad weather. Reduce
vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, in order to maintain a safe distance
between vehicles.
∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. The Preview Function may
not operate properly under the following
conditions. The vehicle is still driveable
under normal conditions and the Brake
Assist will operate.
WARNING
∙ In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime does not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence
of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected.
∙ Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
of you or a collision could occur.
∙ Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
∙ Do not use the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode when driving under
the following conditions:
– When rain or snow adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor.
– When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
– Vehicle position in the lane may cause
the sensor to temporarily not detect a
vehicle in the same lane or may detect
objects or vehicles in other lanes.
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode
This mode allows driving at a speed between
20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
5-82 Starting and driving
– On winding or hilly roads
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
– In very windy areas
∙ Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
LSD2056
THE ICC SWITCH
The system is operated by the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch and four control switches,
all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. ACCEL/RES switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
2. COAST/SET switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
4. DISTANCE
switch*:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
∙ Long
∙ Middle
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode
To choose the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Operating conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode” in this section.
∙ Short
5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
*: This switch only affects the vehicle-tovehicle control mode, not the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode.
How to select the cruise control
mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, quickly push and release the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch.
LSD2534
ICC (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control) mode display and
indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch is ON.
∙ ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.
Starting and driving 5-83
∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that if there is a malfunction in
the ICC system.
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate that
the Preview Function is malfunctioning (the
brake is operative). Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions, have
the vehicle checked. It is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
3. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between
vehicles set with the distance switch.
4. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
LSD2067
Preview function warning light and display
When the Preview Function is not operating
properly, the chime sounds and the system
warning light (orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine and resume driving.
5-84 Starting and driving
3. Cruise system warning light:
Comes on if there is a malfunction in the
cruise control system.
LSD2075
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch is on.
2. Cruise set switch indicator:
LSD2067
Warning light
When the system is not operating properly,
the chime sounds and the system warning
light (orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine, resume driving and then perform
the setting again.
Displays while the vehicle speed is controlled by the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode of the ICC system.
Starting and driving 5-85
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system is
malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, have the
vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
LSD2120
LSD2125
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
A.
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊
The ICC system ON indicator (white), set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on in a standby state for setting.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. The ICC system set
indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle
B will come on. Take your
speed indicator 䊊
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
will maintain the set speed.
OPERATING ICC
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for
approximately 2 seconds:
∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected
5-86 Starting and driving
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
NOTE:
∙ The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver
∙ When the brake operates, a noise may be
heard. This is not a malfunction.
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle
ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC
system will also display the set speed and
selected distance.
A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to
turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC
switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC is operating
∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch to turn off the ICC system, and
reset the ICC system by pushing the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)
Vehicle ahead not detected
LSD2535
1
䊊
2
䊊
System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by
controlling the throttle and applying the
brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle
ahead. The system then controls the vehicle
speed based on the speed of the vehicle
ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.
When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead,
the ICC system gradually accelerates your
vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle
speed. The ICC system then maintains the set
speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system
will be canceled.
Starting and driving 5-87
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
The set vehicle speed will increase by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
∙ Push,
then
quickly
release
the
ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
LSD2557
When passing another vehicle, the set speed
A will flash when the vehicle speed
indicator 䊊
exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect
indicator will turn off when the area ahead of
the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelerator
pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your
vehicle rapidly.
LSD2535
䊊
2
䊊
1
System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead
How to change the set vehicle
speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
∙ Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off.
The ICC indicators will go out.
5-88 Starting and driving
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
∙ Push,
then
quickly
release
the
COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).
LSD2061
LSD2429
How to change the set distance to
the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traffic
conditions.
A is pushed,
Each time the distance switch 䊊
the set distance will change to long, middle,
short and back to long again, in that sequence.
Distance
Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]
1.
Long
180 (55)
2.
Middle
130 (40)
3.
Short
80 (25)
∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
the distance.
Starting and driving 5-89
∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine is
started, the initial setting becomes
“long.”)
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system
warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the
brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance between
vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles
is increasing.
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
5-90 Starting and driving
The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and
the system display may blink when the ICC
sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may
cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect
these objects when the vehicle is driven on
winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or
when entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases you will have to manually control the
proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).
LSD2076
OPERATING CONVENTIONAL
(fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL
MODE
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
A for longer than
CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊
about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
on, the ICC system display and the CRUISE
indicator are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch on for longer than about
1.5 seconds, the ICC system display goes out.
The CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now
set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch again will turn the
system completely off.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following three methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The SET indicator will go out.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the ICC again, quickly
push and release the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise
control mode) again to turn it on.
When the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system is on, the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode cannot be turned on
even though the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is
pushed and held.
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, turn off the DCA system. For additional information, refer to “Distance Control Assist (DCA)” in this section.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch
off when not using the Intelligent Cruise
Control.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
will go out.
3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off.
Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods:
LSD2066
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. (The SET indicator will
come on in the display.) Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain
the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, manually maintain vehicle
speed.
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST/SET switch.
2. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set
switch. When the vehicle attains the
speed you desire, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/
RES switch. Each time you do this, the
set speed will increase by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
Starting and driving 5-91
2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the
COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
Automatic cancellation
Under the following conditions, a chime will
sound and the system control is automatically canceled:
∙ When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 mph (32 km/h)
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the VDC (including the TCS) operates
∙ When a wheel slips
5-92 Starting and driving
SSD0252
ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The ICC system is primarily intended for
use on straight, dry, open roads with light
traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC
system in city traffic or congested areas.
∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system
should be used in evenly flowing traffic.
Do not use the system on roads with
sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy
rain or in fog.
∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely
on the ICC system. This system does not
correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system. The system
will cancel once it judges that the vehicle
has come to a standstill and sound a
warning chime. To prevent the vehicle
from moving, the driver must depress the
brake pedal.
∙ Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The
ICC system may not be able to maintain
the selected distance between vehicles
(following distance) or selected vehicle
speed under some circumstances.
∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never use
the ICC system under the following
conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
bumper around the distance sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill roads
– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent
acceleration or deceleration
– Interference by other radar sources.
∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a
vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. Always stay alert and
avoid using the ICC system where not
recommended in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following
objects:
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle
ahead and the system may not operate properly:
∙ When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area
of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system.
Starting and driving 5-93
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection
zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within the
same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be
detected in the same lane ahead if they are
traveling offset from the centerline of the
lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead
may not be detected until the vehicle has
completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from
the vehicle traveling ahead.
SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the ICC sensor
may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may
temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling
ahead. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or
vehicle condition.
5-94 Starting and driving
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to
manually control the proper distance away
from the vehicle traveling ahead.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the ICC
system may be temporarily unavailable. In
these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle
ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed
of 15 mph (24 km/h)
∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at
a standstill
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When a wheel slips
LSD2615
Starting and driving 5-95
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC
CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed,
the ICC system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor area is covered with ice, a
transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the
ICC system may not detect vehicles ahead. In
these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle
ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor
area.
The system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
LSD2797
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park
the vehicle in a safe location and turn the
engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor
window is blocked. If the radar sensor window is blocked, remove the blocking material.
Restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the ICC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine, resume driving and set the ICC
system again.
Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the system warning
light (orange) will come on.
5-96 Starting and driving
LSD2175
Action to take
If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
∙ Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could
cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor
is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
LSD2702
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This could
cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.
FCC ID: OAYARS3–B
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
IC: 4135A-ARS3B
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Droit applicable : Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Starting and driving 5-97
DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the DCA system
could result in serious injury or death.
The DCA system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver to
maintain a following distance.
∙ DCA helps maintain a distance to the vehicle in front under certain conditions. It
is not a collision avoidance system. Failure to apply the brakes could result in an
accident.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the DCA system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the DCA system. Do
not use the DCA system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system. The system
will cancel once it judges that the vehicle
has come to a standstill with a warning
chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake
pedal.
∙ The DCA system will not apply brake
control while the driver’s foot is on the
accelerator pedal.
5-98 Starting and driving
LSD2702
DCA SYSTEM OPERATION
Always pay attention to the operation of the
vehicle and be ready to manually decelerate
to maintain the proper following distance.
The DCA system may not be able to decelerate the vehicle under some circumstances.
A located
The DCA system uses a sensor 䊊
behind the front bumper of the vehicle to
detect vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor
generally detects the signals returned from
the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor
cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle
ahead, the DCA system may not operate.
The system is intended to assist the driver to
keep a following distance from the vehicle
ahead traveling in the same lane and direction.
The distance sensor is located behind the
A . If the distance sensor 䊊
A
front bumper 䊊
detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the
system will reduce the vehicle speed to help
assist the driver to maintain a following distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to 40% of
vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 490 ft (150 m) ahead.
The distance sensor will not detect the following objects:
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
LSD2068
DCA Indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. DCA system switch indicator:
Indicates that the dynamic driver assistance switch is on.
LIC2889
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
WARNING
The DCA system automatically decelerates
your vehicle to help assist the driver to
maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually brake when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance upon sudden braking by the vehicle
ahead or when a vehicle suddenly appears
in front of you. Always stay alert when using the DCA system.
Starting and driving 5-99
The DCA system helps assist the driver to
keep a following distance to the vehicle
ahead by braking and moving the accelerator
pedal upward in the normal driving condition.
The stoplights of the vehicle come on when
braking is performed by the DCA system.
When the brake operates, a noise may be
heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle is detected ahead:
The vehicle ahead detection indicator comes
on.
When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead:
∙ If the driver’s foot is not on the accelerator pedal, the system activates the brakes
to decelerate smoothly as necessary. If
the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system.
∙ If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator
pedal, the system moves the accelerator
pedal upward to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal.
When brake operation by driver is required:
The system alerts the driver by a warning
chime and blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is on the
accelerator pedal after the warning, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward to
assist the driver to switch to the brake pedal.
5-100 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ When the vehicle ahead detection indicator light is not illuminated, the system
will not control or warn the driver.
∙ Depending on the position of the accelerator pedal, the system may not be able
to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal appropriately.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a standstill,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system. The
system will release brake control with a
warning chime once it judges the vehicle
is at a standstill. To prevent the vehicle
from moving, the driver must depress the
brake pedal. (The system will resume
control automatically once the system
reaches 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Overriding the system:
The following driver’s operations override the
system operation.
∙ When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal even further while the system is
moving the accelerator pedal upward,
the DCA system control of the accelerator pedal is canceled.
∙ When the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the brake control by the system
is not operated.
∙ When the driver’s foot is on the brake
pedal, neither the brake control nor the
alert by the system operates.
∙ When the ICC system is set, the DCA
system will be canceled.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
DCA SYSTEM
To turn on the DCA system, push the dynamic
1 on the steering
driver assistance switch 䊊
wheel after starting the engine. The DCA
2 in the vehicle
system switch indicator light 䊊
information display will illuminate. Push the
dynamic driver assistance switch again to
turn off the DCA system. The DCA system
switch indicator light will turn off.
The system will start to operate after the
vehicle speed becomes above approximately
3 mph (5 km/h).
The dynamic driver assistance switch is used
for the LDP, DCA and BSI systems. When the
dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed,
the LDP system will also turn on or off simultaneously. The DCA system can be individually set to on or off on the display. If the
system is set to off, the system will not turn
on even if the dynamic driver assistance
switch is pushed to on. For additional information, refer to “Setting DCA system to
ON/OFF” in this section.
Setting DCA system to ON/OFF:
LSD2552
The DCA can be turned on/off in the vehicle
information display using the buttons on the
steering wheel.
Starting and driving 5-101
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids,” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Forward,” and press the ENTER
button.
4. To turn on the “Assistance (DCA)” check
the box using the ENTER button.
If the LDP, BSI and DCA systems are set to
off in the vehicle information display and the
dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed,
the LDW indicator light, BSI ON indicator
light, and the DCA system switch indicator
light will blink for approximately 2 seconds.
For additional information on LDP and BSI,
refer to “Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)”
and “Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)” in this
section.
DCA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
∙ This system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
∙ This system will not adapt automatically
to road conditions.
∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely
on the DCA system. This system does not
correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never use
the DCA system under the following
conditions:
– On roads with sharp curves
5-102 Starting and driving
– On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
sensor area of the front bumper
– On steep downhill roads (frequent
braking may result in overheating the
brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill roads
∙ Do not use the DCA system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay
alert and avoid using the DCA system
where not recommended in this warning
section.
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot detect the signals:
∙ When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is
covered with dirt, snow and road spray
∙ When dense exhaust or other smoke
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces the
sensor’s detection
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the luggage
room of your vehicle
The DCA system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s operation. When the front
bumper area around the distance sensor is
covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system
will automatically cancel. If the front bumper
area of the distance sensor is covered with
ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,
etc., the DCA system may not detect them. In
these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may
not be able to maintain the selected following
distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to
check and clean the front bumper area
around the distance sensor regularly.
The DCA system is designed to help assist the
driver to maintain a following distance from
the vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate
as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes
to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the DCA system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking
power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling
lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead
rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the DCA
system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly
enough. If this occurs, the DCA system will
sound a warning chime and blink the system
display to notify the driver to take necessary
action.
The DCA system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must
pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead.
For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.
This system only brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward to help assist the driver
to maintain a following distance from the
vehicle ahead. Acceleration should be operated by the driver.
Starting and driving 5-103
SSD0252
DCA Detection Zone
the system indicator and sounding the
DCA DRIVING SITUATIONS
chime. The driver may have to manually conThe detection zone of the sensor is limited. A
trol the proper distance away from the vevehicle ahead must be in the detection zone
hicle traveling ahead.
for the system to operate.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within the
same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be
detected in the same lane ahead if they are
traveling offset from the center line of the
lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead
may not be detected until the vehicle has
completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking
5-104 Starting and driving
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance between
vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles
is increasing
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
SSD0253
DCA Detection Zones On Winding Roads
distance away from the vehicle traveling
When driving on some roads, such as windahead.
ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the sensor may
Approach warning
detect vehicles in a different lane, or may
temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead. This may cause the system to work
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that veinappropriately.
hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system
warns the driver with the chime and DCA
The detection of vehicles may also be afsystem display. Decelerate by depressing the
fected by vehicle operation (steering maneubrake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle disver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or
tance if:
vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system
may warn you by blinking the system indica∙ The chime sounds.
tor and sounding the chime unexpectedly.
You will have to manually control the proper
The warning chime will not sound when your
vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked
or moving slowly.
Starting and driving 5-105
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by
vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle
condition (for example, if a vehicle is being
driven with some damage).
SSD0284A
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and
the system display may blink when ICC senA or obsor detects vehicles in other lanes 䊊
A . This may
jects on the side of the road 䊊
cause the DCA system to operate inappropriately. The ICC sensor may detect these
objects when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you
will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
5-106 Starting and driving
LSD2080
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Under the following conditions, the DCA system will not operate and the DCA cancellation message will pop up:
∙ When the SNOW mode switch is on (To
use the DCA system, turn off the SNOW
mode switch, then turn on the dynamic
driver assistance switch.)
For additional information about the
SNOW mode switch, refer to “Snow
mode” in this section.
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
DCA system, turn on the VDC, then push
the dynamic driver assistance switch.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is
operating
When the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode is operating, the DCA system
will not operate. (To use the DCA system,
turn the Conventional [fixed speed] cruise
control mode off, then push the dynamic
driver assistance switch.)
For additional information about the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode,
refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in
this section.
When the engine is turned off, the system is
automatically turned off.
1
䊊
2
䊊
LSD2126
LSD2080
System set display with vehicle ahead
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
System set display without vehicle ahead
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
Automatic cancellation
Condition A:
Under the following conditions, the DCA system is automatically canceled. The chime will
sound and the DCA cancellation message will
display.
∙ When SNOW mode is selected by using
the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off with the
dynamic driver assistance switch. Turn the
DCA system back on to use the system.
Starting and driving 5-107
Condition B:
If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
When the sensor area of the front bumper is
dirty, making it impossible to detect a vehicle
ahead, the DCA system is automatically canceled.
The chime sounds and the system warning
light (orange) will come on and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” indicator will
appear.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the DCA system is common
with ICC and is located behind the front bumper.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place, turn the engine off. Clean the
sensor area of the bumper and then perform
the settings again.
LSD2081
For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in this section.
DCA warning light (orange)
Condition C:
For USA
When the DCA system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning light (“DCA” orange) will come on.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle
in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart
the engine, and turn on the DCA system
again.
FCC ID: OAYARS3–B
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-108 Starting and driving
FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
(FEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM (if so equipped)
For Canada
IC: 4135A-ARS3B
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Droit applicable : Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It
is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent
accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
can assist the driver when there is a risk of a
forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the
traveling lane or with a pedestrian.
LSD2703
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
A located behind the
uses a radar sensor 䊊
lower grille of the front bumper to measure
the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same
lane. For pedestrians, the FEB with PedesB intrian Detection system uses a camera 䊊
stalled behind the windshield in addition to
the radar sensor.
Starting and driving 5-109
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
3. FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
SYSTEM OPERATION
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
operates at speeds above approximately
3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection
function, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operates at speeds between 6 –
37 mph (10 – 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle is
detected, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will first provide a warning to the
driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection
indicator and providing an audible alert. In
addition, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system pushes the accelerator pedal up, and
then the system applies partial braking. If the
driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully, but the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system detects that there is still the possibility
of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.
LSD2639
5-110 Starting and driving
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent
and the driver does not take action, the FEB
with Pedestrian Detection system issues the
second warning to the driver by flashing the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency
warning indicator (red), providing an audible
warning, and then automatically applies
harder braking.
If a risk of a forward impact with a pedestrian
is detected, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will provide a warning to the
driver by flashing the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection emergency warning indicator (red),
provides an audible alert and the system will
apply partial baking. If the driver applies the
brakes quickly and forcefully but the FEB
with Pedestrian Detection system detects
that there is still the possibility of a forward
impact with a pedestrian, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the
risk of collision becomes imminent and the
driver does not take action, the FEB with
Pedestrian Detection system automatically
applies harder braking.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when any
braking is performed by the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to
the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as
driving and roadway conditions, the system
may help the driver avoid a forward collision
or may help mitigate the consequences if a
collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is
handling the steering wheel, accelerating or
braking, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned to
avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected ahead.
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
Starting and driving 5-111
TURNING THE FEB WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
SYSTEM ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press
the ENTER button.
3. Select “System” and press the ENTER
button.
When the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is turned off, the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on
when the engine is restarted.
LSD2817
5-112 Starting and driving
∙ The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information
display for the PFCW system. When the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned
off, the PFCW system is also turned off.
FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using
mobile transport such as scooters,
child-operated toys, or skateboards.
– Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or
walking position.
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
– Obstacles on the roadside
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
Listed below are the system limitations for
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance
with these system limitations could result
in serious injury or death.
– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s
path, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the
vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
– For pedestrian detection, the FEB
with Pedestrian Detection system will
not function when the vehicle is driven
at speeds over approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or below approximately
6 mph (10km/h).
∙ The radar sensor FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system does not detect the
following objects:
– Small pedestrians (including small
children), animals and cyclists.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestrians in
darkness or in tunnels, even if there is
street lighting in the area.
∙ For pedestrians, the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system will not issue the first
warning and will not push the accelerator
pedal up.
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead
is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
∙ The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if speed difference
between the two vehicles is too small.
∙ The radar sensor FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
– Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,
snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms,
and road spray from other vehicles).
– Driving on a steep downhill slope or
roads with sharp curves.
– Driving on a bumpy road surface, such
as an uneven dirt road.
– If dirt, ice, snow or other material is
covering the radar sensor area.
– Interference by other radar sources.
Starting and driving 5-113
– The camera area of windshield is
fogged up, or covered with dirt, water
drops, ice, snow, etc.
– Excessively heavy baggage is loaded
in the rear seat or the trunk room of
your vehicle.
– Strong light (for example, sunlight or
high beams from oncoming vehicles)
enters the front camera. Strong light
causes the area around the pedestrian
to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.
∙ The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s (radar and camera)
functionality, within certain limitations.
The system may not detect blockage of
sensor areas covered by ice, snow or
stickers, for example. In these cases, the
system may not be able to warn the
driver properly. Be sure that you check,
clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
– A sudden change in brightness occurs.
(For example, when the vehicle enters
or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or
lightning flashes.)
– The poor contrast of a person to the
background, such as having clothing
color or pattern which is similar to the
background.
– The pedestrian’s profile is partially
obscured or unidentifiable due to the
pedestrian transporting luggage,
wearing bulky or very loose-fitting
clothing or accessories.
∙ The system performance may degrade in
the following conditions:
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
– The vehicle is driven on a slope.
5-114 Starting and driving
∙ In some road and traffic conditions, the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
may unexpectedly apply partial braking.
When acceleration is necessary, depress
the accelerator pedal to override the
system.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
In the following conditions, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
blinks and the system will be turned off automatically.
∙ The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source.
∙ The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen.
∙ Strong light is shining from the front.
∙ The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
∙ The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will resume automatically.
LSD2591
Starting and driving 5-115
NOTE:
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield or camera
area is misted or frozen, it will take a period
of time to remove it after A/C turns ON. If
dirt appears on this area, visit an INFINITI
retailer.
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
stops working, the PFCW system (if so
equipped) will also stop working.
Condition B:
In the following conditions, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light will
illuminate and the system will be turned off
automatically and the “Unavailable: Front
Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
∙ The sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position and turn the engine
off. Clean the radar sensor area of the front
bumper or the camera area of the windshield
with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the
warning light continues to illuminate, have
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
5-116 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange)
will illuminate and the warning message
[Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the FEB with
Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
NOTE:
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
stops working, the PFCW system (if so
equipped) will also stop working.
LSD2703
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located behind the
The radar sensor 䊊
lower grille of the front bumper. The camera
B is located on the upper side of the wind䊊
shield.
To keep the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep sensor areas of the front
bumper and windshield clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensors (ex. Bumper, windshield).
PREDICTIVE FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (PFCW) (if so equipped)
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers, or install
any accessory near the sensors. This
could block sensor signals, and/or cause
failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s detection
capability.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYARS3–B
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
IC: 4135A-ARS3B
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the PFCW system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The PFCW system can help warn the
driver before a collision occurs but will
not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The PFCW system can help alert the driver
when there is a sudden braking of a second
vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead
in the same lane.
Droit applicable : Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Starting and driving 5-117
LSD2702
A
The PFCW system uses a radar sensor 䊊
located behind the lower grille of the front
bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
LSD2612
5-118 Starting and driving
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
LSD2263
PFCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The PFCW system operates at speeds above
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the PFCW system will warn the driver
by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.
Starting and driving 5-119
TURNING THE PFCW SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the
PFCW system ON or OFF.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press
the ENTER button.
3. Select “System” and press the ENTER
button.
When the PFCW system is turned off, the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The PFCW system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
LSD2817
5-120 Starting and driving
∙ The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB with Pedestrian
Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information
display for the PFCW system. When the
FEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned
off, the PFCW system is also turned off.
LSD2312
Illustration A
Starting and driving 5-121
LSD2265
Illustration B
PFCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in
the roadway
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
– Oncoming vehicles
– Interference by other radar sources.
– Crossing vehicles
– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
Listed below are the system limitations for
the PFCW system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ (Illustration A) The PFCW system does
not function when a vehicle ahead is a
narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.
∙ The PFCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead in the following conditions:
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:
5-122 Starting and driving
– Snow or heavy rain
– Driving in a tunnel
– (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed.
– (Illustration C) When the distance to
the vehicle ahead is too close, the
beam of the radar sensor is
obstructed.
– (Illustration D) When driving on a
steep downhill slope or roads with
sharp curves.
∙ The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within
certain limitations. The system may not
detect some forms of obstruction of the
sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers,
etc. In these cases, the system may not be
able to warn the driver properly. Be sure
that you check, clean and clear the sensor
area regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime may
not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-123
LSD2266
Illustration C
5-124 Starting and driving
LSD2313
Illustration D
Starting and driving 5-125
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the PFCW
system is automatically turned off.
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the PFCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
PFCW system is automatically turned off.
The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the
“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
LSD2616
5-126 Starting and driving
Action to take
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position and turn the engine
off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille
with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the
warning light continues to illuminate, have
the PFCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the PFCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
NOTE:
If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
stops working, the PFCW system (if so
equipped) will also stop working.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the PFCW system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will sound,
the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the
warning message [Malfunction] will appear
in the vehicle information display.
LSD2702
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located behind the lower
The sensor 䊊
grille of the front bumper.
To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar
objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
Starting and driving 5-127
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could
cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer.
For USA
FCC ID: OAYARS3–B
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-128 Starting and driving
For Canada
IC: 4135A-ARS3B
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Droit applicable : Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine
life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run
the engine over 4,000 RPM.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first
500 miles (805 kilometers). Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel
economy from your vehicle.
∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising
speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact to
fuel economy.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before
driving.
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while
driving versus idling.
Starting and driving 5-129
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep all the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
5-130 Starting and driving
INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
(AWD) (if so equipped)
If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent
AWD system while the engine is running,
messages are displayed in the meter.
LSD2082
LSD2083
LSD2084
If the AWD error warning message is displayed, there may be a malfunction in the
Intelligent AWD system. Reduce vehicle
speed and have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
The AWD high temperature message may be
displayed while trying to free a stuck vehicle
due to increased oil temperature. The driving
mode may change to 2-wheel drive. If this
message is displayed, stop the vehicle with
the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so.
Then if the message turns off, you can continue driving.
The tire size message may be displayed if
there is a large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels. Pull off the
road in a safe area, with the engine idling.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the
tire pressure is correct and that the tires are
not excessively worn.
If any warning messages continue to be displayed, have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-131
WARNING
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires. Accelerating quickly,
sharp steering maneuvers or sudden
braking may cause loss of control, even
with Intelligent AWD engaged.
∙ For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any drive or
reverse position with the engine running.
Doing so may result in drivetrain damage
or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious personal injury or
vehicle damage.
∙ Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing) or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure that
you inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage.
5-132 Starting and driving
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the engine on a free roller
when any of the wheels are raised.
∙ If you use the free roller, rotate four
wheels with the same speed without raising any wheels.
∙ If an AWD warning message is displayed
while driving there may be a malfunction
in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle
speed immediately and have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ The powertrain may be damaged if you
continue driving when the AWD temperature or tire size incorrect messages
are displayed
∙ If the AWD high temperature message is
displayed while you are driving, pull off
the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. The driving mode will change to
2WD to prevent the AWD system from
malfunctioning. If the warning message
turns off, you can drive again.
∙ If the tire size incorrect message is displayed while you are driving, pull off the
road in a safe area with the engine idling.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, that
the tire pressure is correct and that the
tires are not excessively worn.
∙ If a warning message continues to be displayed after the above operations, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
A:
䊊
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
WSD0050
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste
paper or rags. They may ignite and cause
a fire.
∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure
to do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result in an
accident. Make sure the shift lever has
been pushed as far forward as it can go
and cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while the
vehicle is unattended.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to cause
a significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
B:
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL,
C:
NO CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
Starting and driving 5-133
POWER STEERING
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of the
vehicle, but the steering will be harder to
operate. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to operate
the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving
at a very low speed, the power assist for the
steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged.
While the power assist is reduced, steering
wheel operation will become heavy. When
the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the
power steering system to overheat.
5-134 Starting and driving
BRAKE SYSTEM
You may hear a sound when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will
still have braking at two wheels.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the power steering system checked. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering, but you will
still have control of the vehicle. At this time,
greater steering effort is required to operate
the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns
and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can
stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the
brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down
a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes
may reduce braking performance and could
result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and
result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result,
your braking distance will be longer and the
vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal
to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes
return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at
high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or rotors are replaced, in order to
assure the best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the INFINITI
Service Manual. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
– When installing a spare tire, make sure
that it is the proper size and type as
specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting from
careless or dangerous driving techniques.
It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do
not lock during hard braking or when braking
on slippery surfaces. The system detects the
rotation speed at each wheel and varies the
brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel
from locking and sliding. By preventing each
wheel from locking, the system helps the
driver maintain steering control and helps to
minimize swerving and spinning on slippery
surfaces.
∙ Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
Using the system
– When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the
vehicle to avoid obstacles.
Starting and driving 5-135
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may
result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates
the ABS warning light on the instrument
panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates
at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The
speed varies according to road conditions.
5-136 Starting and driving
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation
in the brake pedal and hear a noise from
under the hood or feel a vibration from the
actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate
that road conditions are hazardous and extra
care is required while driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even with
light pedal force.
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power
is transferred to a non-slipping drive
wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on
vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes to
note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required to
help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
and
indicator lights come on
the
in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator
lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator illuminates
VDC system. The
to indicate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by trans-
ferring power to a non-slipping drive wheel.
indicator flashes if this occurs. All
The
other VDC functions are off and the
indicator will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or
feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain controllability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or by
careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly. This could adversely
affect vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake pads,
rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate
and
properly and both the
the
indicator lights may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
INFINITI recommended or are extremely
and
deteriorated, both the
indicator lights may illuminate.
Starting and driving 5-137
∙ When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly
indicator may flash or both
and the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. Do not drive on these types of
roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
5-138 Starting and driving
ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (if so
equipped)
This system senses driving based on the driver’s steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to help smooth vehicle
response.
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
the VDC system, the active trace control system is also turned off.
If the active trace control is not functioning
properly, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection
system warning indicator light illuminates in
the instrument panel.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of force
to each of the four wheels depending on the
radius of the turn.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain controllability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or by
careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly. This could adversely
affect vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake pads,
rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate
and
properly and both the
the
indicator lights may illuminate.
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
∙ If engine control related parts are not
INFINITI recommended or are extremely
and
deteriorated, both the
indicator lights may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly
indicator may flash or both
and the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. Do not drive on these types of
roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Be especially careful when
stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy
roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards may result in a loss of
control of the vehicle and possible serious
injury or death.
∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
backwards and may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
∙ The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards
on a hill under all load or road conditions.
Always be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards. Failure to do so may result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps the
brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle
from rolling backward in the time it takes the
driver to release the brake pedal and apply
the accelerator.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
∙ The transmission is shifted to a forward
or reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
by applying the brake. The maximum
holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and
the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate
when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level
road.
Starting and driving 5-139
FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
∙ The sonar system is not a replacement for
proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles
or objects.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that
it is safe to do so before parking.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
LSD2135
The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds a
tone to inform the driver of obstacles near
the bumper.
When the sonar system is turned on, the
sonar view will automatically appear in the
center display when the camera is activated.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar system
could result in serious injury or death.
5-140 Starting and driving
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the
sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false
alarm.
CAUTION
∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system
volume or an open vehicle window) will
interfere with the tone and it may not be
heard.
∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on the
bumper fascias) free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible
signal of front obstacles when the shift lever
is in the D (Drive) position and both front and
rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R
(Reverse) position.
Sonar Operation Table
FR Sensor
RR Sensor
Range
Sound
Display
Sound
P
x
†
x
Display
†
R
o
o
o
o
N
x
†
x
†
D
o
o
x
†
o – Display/Beep when detect
† – Display on camera view
x – No Display and Beep
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only
the corner sensor and the distance does not
change. The tone will stop when the obstacle
get away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
LSD2136
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer
A
to an object, the corner sonar indicator 䊊
appears. When the center of the vehicle
moves close to an object, the center sonar (if
B appears.
so equipped) indicator 䊊
LSD2137
A will appear when
The system indicators 䊊
the vehicle moves closer to an object.
Starting and driving 5-141
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
SONAR SYSTEM
The system is automatically activated when
the ignition is in the ON position and the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:
1. Press the SETTINGbutton on the control
panel and highlight the “Camera/Sonar”
key on the display using the INFINITI
controller then press the ENTER button.
2. Highlight the “Sonar” key then press the
ENTER button.
3. To turn the sonar system on or off, highlight the “Sonar” key and press the ENTER button. To enable the front sensors
only, highlight “FR Sensor Only” and
press the ENTER button.
NOTE:
The system will automatically be turned on
when the engine is restarted.
LSD2697
5-142 Starting and driving
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the sonar system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Read and understand the limitations of
the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the
function of the sonar system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources
such as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic
drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not
detect small objects below the bumper or
on the ground.
∙ The system may not detect the following
objects: fluffy objects such as snow,
cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or
wedge-shaped objects.
∙ The system may not detect objects at
speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may
not detect certain angular or moving
objects.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system
will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog. The blocked condition
may also be caused by objects such as ice,
frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2135
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors are located on the front
and rear bumpers. Always keep the area near
the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing
water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-143
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the
sonar sensors. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around
the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it
into the key hole, or use the INFINITI Intelligent Key.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating
the vehicle. For additional information, refer
to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, refer
to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery
should be checked regularly. For additional
information, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
5-144 Starting and driving
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance of
these tires will be substantially reduced
in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
INFINITI recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all
four wheels. It is recommended that you
visit an INFINITI retailer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
the
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and very
hard to drive on. The vehicle will have
much less traction or “grip” under these
conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet
ice until the road is salted or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even more
traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise clear
road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is
seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try
not to brake while on the ice, and avoid
any sudden steering maneuvers.
∙ Do not use the cruise control on slippery
roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with
cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or
lower.
WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater with
an ungrounded electrical system or a
2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously
injured by an electrical shock if you use an
ungrounded connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the engine
block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in
an electrical shock and can cause serious
injury.
Starting and driving 5-145
∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock
and cause serious personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.
5-146 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Roadside assistance program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . .6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Towing recommended by INFINITI. . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . 6-16
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so
slowly that your vehicle might become a
hazard to other traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
6-2 In case of emergency
In the event of a roadside emergency, roadside assistance service is available to you.
Please refer to your Warranty Information
Booklet (U.S.) or the Warranty & Roadside
Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for
details.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
FLAT TIRE
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following
procedure:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less than
1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light is lit,
and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display,
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If equipped, the system also
displays pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If
the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of
it by the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).
For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sections
of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire as soon as possible.
In case of emergency 6-3
∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire
sealant into the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
6-4 In case of emergency
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and
to signal professional road assistance
personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the CVT is shifted into P
(Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is on
a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
LCE2142
A.
Blocks
B.
Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when
it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
LCE2359
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage
board in the cargo area using the handle
A.
䊊
LCE2036
LCE2340
2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by
lifting up using the handles.
It should not be necessary to remove or disconnect the Bose sub-woofer (if so
A when removing the jack and
equipped) 䊊
B.
tool kit cover 䊊
In case of emergency 6-5
5. The lowering mechanism for the spare
tire is located on the passenger side of
H to
the cargo area. Remove the cover 䊊
access the lowering mechanism.
LCE2348
3. Remove the tool kit containing the jackC by releasing the Velcro
ing tools 䊊
D.
straps 䊊
LCE2350
4. Remove the jack.
E . If
∙ The jack is secured by a fastener 䊊
unable to loosen the fastener with
your fingers, assemble the jacking rod
F into the wheel nut wrench 䊊
G as
䊊
illustrated and rotate counterclockwise to release.
∙ Insert the flat end of the wheel nut
G into the slot of the fastener
wrench 䊊
E , and rotate counterclockwise to re䊊
lease the jack.
6-6 In case of emergency
NOTE:
Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle
before attempting to remove the winch from
the spare tire.
9. After removing the spare tire from under
the vehicle, be sure to crank the cable up
by rotating the winch socket clockwise
to stow it.
CAUTION
LCE2351
I to
6. Attach the spare tire winch socket 䊊
the lowering mechanism nut.
7. To lower the spare tire, connect the
G to the jacking rod
wheel nut wrench 䊊
F and insert the T-shaped end of the
䊊
I and
jacking rod into the winch socket 䊊
rotate counterclockwise.
8. Once the spare tire is lowered, release it
from the vehicle by guiding the lowering
cable and winch through the center of
the tire.
∙ Make sure safety cable is coiled above
spare tire when reinstalling spare
tire/wheel.
∙ When re-installing the spare tire under
the vehicle after use, be sure to secure it
with the tire stem facing down toward
the ground. If the spare tire is improperly
secured with the tire stem facing up towards the bottom of the vehicle, there is
an increased risk of separating from the
vehicle in the event of a crash which may
pose a hazard in traffic or risk of injury to
others.
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it
with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack
provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only
your vehicle during a tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never use
any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for
vehicles with limited slip differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the
ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.
In case of emergency 6-7
Always refer to the illustration for the correct
placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.
LCE2385
6-8 In case of emergency
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns
by turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
The jack-up points are indicated by
stamped arrows on the side of the
frame.
The jack should be used on firm and level
ground.
LCE2043
NOTE:
If the lug nut wrench/jack handle contacts
the ground while raising the vehicle, disassemble the lug nut wrench from the jack extension rod, rotate it 90 degrees and reassemble.
LCE0087
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove
the tire.
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the
jack as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle
until the tire clears the ground.
In case of emergency 6-9
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
B, 䊊
C, 䊊
D, 䊊
E ). Lower the vehicle
A, 䊊
(䊊
completely.
WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to
become loose or come off. This could
cause an accident.
WCE0056
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency use.
For additional information, refer to “Wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D,䊊
E )
sequence illustrated (䊊
until they are tight.
6-10 In case of emergency
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to
become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 621 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended
that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to the
driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and
jacking equipment in the vehicle.
6. Close the liftgate.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire and
jacking equipment are properly secured
after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden
stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below must
be followed.
WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead
to a battery explosion, resulting in severe
injury or death. It could also damage your
vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always present
in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
∙ Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any time.
Keep hands and other objects away from
it.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause
severe burns. If the fluid should come into
contact with anything, immediately flush
the contacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-11
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to
4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the
positive cable.
LCE2223
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).
3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.
6-12 In case of emergency
4. Connect the jumper cables in the seA,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D ).
quence illustrated (䊊
CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift
bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not touch
moving parts in the engine compartment
and that the cable clamps do not contact
any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
PUSH STARTING
CAUTION
∙ CVT models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The threeway catalyst may be damaged.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap
is removed, pressurized hot water will
spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading),
or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect
abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the
engine.) Do not open the hood further
until no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine,
stand clear to prevent getting burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or
loose, or the cooling fan does not run,
stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir
tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
In case of emergency 6-13
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictions
and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are
available from an INFINITI retailer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the
applicable laws and procedures for towing.
To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI
recommends having a service operator tow
your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of
these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
6-14 In case of emergency
For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
INFINITI
INFINITI recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
LCE2370
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the
vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models equipped with a
CVT with any of the wheels on the ground
as this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transfer case and
transmission.
In case of emergency 6-15
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism (for models with a
steering lock mechanism).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
LCE2371
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models
with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck
as illustrated.
CAUTION
∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the rear
wheels on the ground or on towing
dollies:
6-16 In case of emergency
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service to
recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to main structural members of the
vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed for
vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed
specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the
recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed. This
could cause them to explode and result in
serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could
also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-17
MEMO
6-18 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning the seat tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of
it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a
mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general
purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean,
lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in the
detergent. Some car washes, especially
brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic
vehicle components, causing them to
crack. This could affect their appearance,
and also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body cover.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight
or while the vehicle body is hot, as the
surface may become water-spotted.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must
be taken when removing caked-on dirt or
other foreign substances so the paint
surface is not scratched or damaged.
7-2 Appearance and care
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable
to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these
areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care
that the drain holes in the lower edge of the
door are open. Spray water under the body
and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and
wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove built-up
wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that
may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from
the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at an INFINITI retailer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for these
products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up
and causing the acceleration of corrosion on
the underbody and suspension. Before the
winter period and again in the spring, the
underseal must be checked and, if necessary,
re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for
glass to become coated with a film after the
vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or rear
window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially
during winter months in areas where road
salt is used. If not removed, road salt can
discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating
to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires,
it may react with the coating and form a
compound. This compound may come off the
tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely
removed
from
the
tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.
Appearance and care 7-3
CLEANING INTERIOR
This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on
the center console and door pull finishers. If
cleaning is required use mild soap and water.
However if mild soap and water won’t clean
the center console and door pull finishers, use
Genuine INFINITI Vinyl and Leather Cleaner
(or equivalent).
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,
soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution,
then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order
to maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that may
stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the
air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar
material on the interior surfaces or surface damage may occur. Such damage is
not covered under the INFINITI
warranty.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and should
be removed promptly. Do not use saddle
soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or ammoniabased cleaners as they may damage the
leather’s natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage
the lens cover.
7-4 Appearance and care
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to
hang free and not contact an interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using the air fresheners.
∙ Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook.
For additional information, refer to
"Floor mat installation" in this section.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to make
sure they are properly installed.
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position and with
the parking brake fully applied, position
the floor mat in the floorwell so that the
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s).
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior, check
the floor mats to make sure they are
properly installed.
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
The use of Genuine INFINITI floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning
and replaced if they become excessively
worn.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and with the
parking brake applied, fully apply and
release all pedals. The floor mat must not
interfere with pedal operation or prevent
the pedal from returning to its normal
position.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
LAI2002
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
When installing Genuine INFINITI floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision, injury or death:
Floor mat installation
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the
floor mat positioning hooks for each seating
position varies depending on the vehicle.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
∙ Use only Genuine INFINITI floor mats or
equivalent floor mats, specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and
model year.
Appearance and care 7-5
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the
shade before using them. For additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
WARNING
LAI2003
Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.
Floor mat installation for 3rd row
seats (if so equipped)
LAI2089
When installing Genuine INFINITI floor mats
in the 3rd row seating positions:
1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so
that the floor mat’s installation tabs are
aligned with the rearmost part of 2nd
row seat tracks.
A
2. Insert the floor mat installation tabs 䊊
B
underneath the 2nd row seat tracks 䊊
and ensure that the floor mat is properly
positioned.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
7-6 Appearance and care
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since
these materials may severely weaken the
seat belt webbing.
CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the seats.
Clean periodically with a high-powered
vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce
the ability to adjust the seat. A wet cleansing
agent may be used if necessary.
CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
where the temperatures stay above freezing
and where atmospheric pollution exists and
road salt is used.
Temperature
∙ The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
Air pollution
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the
air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use
accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt
also accelerates the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep
the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and
brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you consult an
INFINITI retailer.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
Appearance and care 7-7
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Engine compartment check locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . .8-9
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
INFINITI Intelligent Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following
are general precautions which should be
closely observed.
WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
the parking brake securely and block the
wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition switch is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed
space such as a garage, be sure there is
proper ventilation for exhaust gases to
escape.
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary
to work under the vehicle, support it with
safety stands.
∙ If you must work with the engine running,
keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools
away from moving fans, belts and any
other moving parts.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine
models are under high pressure even
when the engine is off, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,
engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always
conform to local regulations for disposal
of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) related
component harnesses disconnected
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine INFINITI service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer to
“Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any
servicing, it is recommended that you have it
done by an INFINITI retailer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ35DD engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine coolant reservoir
Drive belt location
Fuse box
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse box
Fuse/Fusible link box
Battery
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator cap
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
NOTE:
Some engine covers removed for clarity.
LDI3131
Do-it-yourself 8-3
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution contains
rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on
precautions, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure
type radiator cap. To prevent engine
damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
8-4 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection
is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant other
than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow
the coolant manufacturer’s instructions
to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other
types of coolant solutions other than
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling system.
∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years.
Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance
and schedules" section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
LDI2860
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
B , add coolant to the MAX
the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty, check the
level 䊊
coolant level in the radiator when the engine
is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the
radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to
the filler opening and also add it to the reserA.
voir up to the MAX level 䊊
For additional information on the location of
the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine
compartment check locations” in this section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
An INFINITI retailer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be found
in the INFINITI Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the
radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon
as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children
and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
Do-it-yourself 8-5
ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
LDI3014
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
8-6 Do-it-yourself
WDI0214
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the
oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
A , relevel is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
move the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not
C.
fill oil level above H (High) mark 䊊
6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating
conditions.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with used
oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon
as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.
LDI3013
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊
B with a wrench
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional
information, refer to “Changing engine
oil filter” in this section.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive
force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain and
refill capacity, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on
the oil temperature and drain time. Use
these specifications for reference only.
Always use the dipstick to determine
when the proper amount of oil is in the
engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter
B.
䊊
A from the right engine
4. Remove pins 䊊
protector located inside right wheel well,
B
remove protector. Remove oil filter 䊊
with an oil filter wrench by turning it
counterclockwise. Then remove the oil
filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface
of the engine. Failure to do so could
lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
LDI2562
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
8-8 Do-it-yourself
∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place
to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick
hole when filling the engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CAUTION
∙ INFINITI recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in INFINITI CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) or Manual transmission fluid in an
INFINITI CVT, as it may damage the CVT.
Damage caused by the use of fluids other
than as recommended is not covered under INFINITI’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused by
the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under INFINITI’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend an INFINITI retailer
for servicing.
LDI2861
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked when the
fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to
86ºF (0 to 30ºC). The fluid level can be
checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap. To check the fluid level,
remove the cap. The fluid level should be
A and MIN 䊊
B lines.
between the MAX 䊊
B line, add
If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.
Do-it-yourself 8-9
BRAKE FLUID
WARNING
CAUTION
Power steering fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.
CAUTION
∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
∙ Use of a power steering fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent
will prevent the power steering system
from operating properly.
LDI2463
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid
may damage the brake system. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
system and affect the vehicle’s stopping
ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out
of reach of children.
8-10 Do-it-yourself
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
B , the brake
brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊
warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid
A . For additional inforup to the MAX line 䊊
mation on the recommended type of brake
fluid,
refer
to
“Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
For additional information on the location of
the brake fluid reservoir, refer to “Engine
compartment check locations” in this section.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture
ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
LDI2583
CAUTION
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This
may result in damage to the paint.
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when
the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message
shows on the vehicle information display.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates
at full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery
No smoking, No exposed flames, No
Sparks
WARNING
Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
2
䊊
Shield eyes
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.
3
䊊
Keep away from children
1
䊊
Never allow children to handle battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
4
䊊
Battery acid
5
䊊
Note operating instructions
6
䊊
Explosive gas
8-12 Do-it-yourself
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause
blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water
for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into
your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Any corrosion should be washed off with
a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days
or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.)
WARNING
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery which
can generate heat, reduce battery life,
and in some cases lead to an explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness
or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted
surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or
battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the
acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing,
immediately flush with water for at least
15 minutes and seek medical attention.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children.
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Do-it-yourself 8-13
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual. If the engine does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be
replaced. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver
as shown. Use a cloth to protect the
battery case.
WDI0529
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom
of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.
8-14 Do-it-yourself
DRIVE BELT
SPARK PLUGS
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with
the maintenance schedule found in your
"Maintenance and schedules" section of
this manual.
LDI2099
1.
2.
3.
4
Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
Generator pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped
A spark plugs as frequently as conventional
䊊
type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the
"Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
Do-it-yourself 8-15
AIR CLEANER
WARNING
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result in
serious injury.
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push
A and pull the cover upward.
the tabs 䊊
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
damage the spark plugs.
The viscous paper type filter element should
not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of this
manual.
If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
LDI2553
WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air cleaner
filter off can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner filter not only
cleans the intake air, it also stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner is not installed and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Never
drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be
cautious working on the engine when the
air cleaner is off.
8-16 Do-it-yourself
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover with
a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make sure
the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing
A.
and latch the clips 䊊
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of
airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The
filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to
the "Maintenance and schedules" section of
this manual for change intervals.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water.
If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace
the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage
the windshield and impair driver vision.
LDI2757
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
B.
2. Push the release tab 䊊
A down and re3. Move the wiper blade 䊊
move.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.
Do-it-yourself 8-17
Rear window wiper blade
CAUTION
If checking or replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.
LDI2710
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful
D.
not to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊
This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
C.
small pin 䊊
8-18 Do-it-yourself
BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, it is
recommended that you have the brakes
checked. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
light to moderate stops is normal and does
not affect the function or performance of the
brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be
followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the
"Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual.
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit an
INFINITI retailer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched scraping
or screeching sound will be heard when the
vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard
whether or not the brake pedal is depressed.
Have the brakes checked as soon as possible
if the wear indicator sound is heard.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
FUSES
LDI3117
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical
system or electronic control units or cause a
fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
8-20 Do-it-yourself
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
LDI0456
A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
new fuse 䊊
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate
and fuses are in good condition, check the
fusible links. If any of these fusible links are
melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN
parts.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
LDI2092
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical
system or electronic control units or cause a
fire.
LDI0456
A , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
equivalent good fuse 䊊
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-21
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY
CAUTION
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
A
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it
into the slit 䊊
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.
LDI2001
8-22 Do-it-yourself
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points
will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
C and 䊊
D.
䊊
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
LDI2637
Do-it-yourself 8-23
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the LED fog light bulb
For additional information on headlight bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
If LED fog light bulb replacement is required,
it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service.
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb
If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
WARNING
cHIGH
VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights
replaced by a certified service technician.
For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
FOG LIGHTS
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
8-24 Do-it-yourself
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
High/ Low
Park/Daytime running
Turn
Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
High/ Low
Park/Daytime running
Turn
Door mirror turn signal light*
Front fog light
Map light*
Footwell light*
Personal light*
Glove box light*
Step light*
Courtesy light*
Puddle light*
Vanity mirror light*
Cargo light*
High-mounted stop light*
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop*
Turn
Backup (reversing) assembly*
Backup
Tail
License plate light*
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
35
—
28/8
—
D2S
—
7444NA
—
35
—
21
—
—
8
3.4
8
—
3.8
—
—
2
8
—
D2S
—
WY21W
—
—
—
158
—
—
194
—
—
—
—
—
—
21
—
W21W
16
—
5
921
—
W5W
* It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for replacement.
Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI retailer for the latest parts information.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
1.
2
3
4
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Headlight assembly
Map light
Personal light
Step light
Door mirror turn signal light
Cargo light
License light
High-mounted stop light
Backup (reversing) assembly
Rear combination light
Puddle light
Fog light
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
LDI2941
8-26 Do-it-yourself
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens,
light and/or cover using a cloth and suitable
tool.
1 the
1. Remove the trim surrounding 䊊
housing.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
2. Remove the two screws holding the as2 to the vehicle.
sembly 䊊
3 .
3. Remove the assembly 䊊
4.
4. Replace the necessary bulbs 䊊
LDI2085
Rear combination light
Do-it-yourself 8-27
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
“Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped,
the system also displays pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the dis8-28 Do-it-yourself
play screen by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel.
driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in the
“Instruments and controls” section,
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”
section and “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on
the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire
Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb
while parking.
TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator
provides visual and audible signals
outside the vehicle for inflating the
tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. For additional information,
refer to “TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not
load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle
may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to
premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and
could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in
failure
of
other
vehicle
components.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle,
use a tire pressure gauge to ensure
that the tire pressures are at the
specified level.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
4
䊊
5
䊊
6
䊊
Tire and Loading Information label
1
䊊
2
䊊
Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can be
seated in the vehicle.
Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.
8-30 Do-it-yourself
3
䊊
LDI2737
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
to this pressure when the tires are
cold. Tires are considered COLD
after the vehicle has been parked
for 3 or more hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds. The recommended cold
tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to
the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
Spare tire size.
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
LDI0393
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly with
the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as
needed.
Size
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
235/65R18
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
235/55R20
Spare Tire:
T165/90D18
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
33 psi, 230 kPa
35 psi, 240 kPa
60 psi, 420 kPa
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
Do-it-yourself 8-31
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information
on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard
certification. The TIN can be used to
identify the tire in case of a recall.
8-32 Do-it-yourself
WDI0395
1
䊊
Example
Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not
all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio,
gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
LDI2786
Example
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for
䊊
a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The
symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the
Tire Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
7 The word “radial”
䊊
TYPES OF TIRES
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure
Manufacturer
shown.
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
Other Tire-related Terminology
5 Maximum load rating
䊊
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊
Indicates whether the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
8-34 Do-it-yourself
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊
or
brand
name
is
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward
facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle.
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be sure
all four tires are of the same type (i.e.,
Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. An INFINITI retailer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the low tire pressure
warning system.
∙ Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction and tread pattern on
all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles
which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential
gears.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
∙ ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked and
corrected as necessary. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service.
to the original equipment tires. If you do not,
it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
All season tires
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
the tire.
INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires
have better snow traction than All Season
tires and may be more appropriate in some
areas.
Summer tires
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on
dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rating
“M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use
of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on 235/55R20 size tires. Installation of the
tire chains/cables on 235/55R20 size tires
will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan
to use tire chains/cables, you should install
235/65R18 size tires on your vehicle.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before
installing tire chains. When installing tire
chains, make sure they are the proper size for
the tires on your vehicle and are installed
according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class
“S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted
tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use
Class “S” chains are designed to meet the
minimum clearances between the tire and the
closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or cables).
The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end
links of the tire chain must be secured or
removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is
recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each tire
rotation interval.
∙
WDI0258
∙
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
INFINITI recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
∙
∙
WARNING
After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the spare tire in the
tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
WDI0259
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because some
tire damage may not be obvious.
Replace the tires as necessary to
prevent tire failure and possible
personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carrying
capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires”
in the “Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, biasbelted or radial), or tread patterns can
adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight
aim and bumper height. Some of these
effects may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
∙ For 2WD models, if your vehicle was
originally equipped with four tires that
were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the
new tires on the rear axle. Placing new
tires on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving conditions
and cause an accident and personal
injury.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason,
always replace with wheels which have
the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a
different off-set could cause premature
tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system
and/or interference with the brake discs.
Such interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad wear. For additional information on
wheel off-set dimensions, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS, such as the spare tire, TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit
an INFINITI retailer for this service.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID
registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by INFINITI. The valve stem cap
may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be
clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired.
Such wheels or tires could have structural
damage and could fail without warning.
∙ The use of retread
recommended.
tires
is
not
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Wheel balance
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is
not handled correctly. Be careful when
handling the TPMS sensor.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
Wheel balance service should be performed
with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to
mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside of
the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss
of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
∙ INFINITI recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with
the standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used on
the front wheels (drive wheels).
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the spare
tire as soon as the tread wear indicators
appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not
fit properly and may cause damage to the
vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original tire,
ground clearance is reduced. To avoid
damage to the vehicle, do not drive over
obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash since it
may get caught.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at the
same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do-it-yourself 8-39
MEMO
8-40 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . .9-5
Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . . . .9-5
Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Maintenance schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating conditions . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is
essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions
and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the
maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section
are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for
this service.
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation. They are essential for
proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly
as prescribed.
INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs.
They are completely qualified to work on
INFINITI vehicles before work begins.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
You can be confident that an INFINITI retailer’s service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, an INFINITI retailer.
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should be
performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause
or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary
latch keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and installed
securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts.
Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive
wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or
age.
Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on
a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a
need for wheel alignment. If the steering
wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway
speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every
six months for cracks or other damage. Have
a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified
repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to
stop, have your vehicle checked immediately.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer for this service. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P
(Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep
hill check that the vehicle is held securely with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position without
applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied. If the parking brake
needs adjustment, it is recommended that
you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches
lock securely in every position. Check that the
head restraints/headrests move up and
down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped)
hold securely in all latched positions.
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
The fluid should be at the bottom of the filler
opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery
power when the engine is not running
(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,
etc.).
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating the
heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and
that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time
you check the engine oil or refuel).
NOTE:
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt is
not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound
of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a
smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the
exhaust system inspected. It is recommended
that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this
service. For additional information, refer to
“Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle
has been parked for a while. Water dripping
from the air conditioner after use is normal. If
you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes
are evident, check for the cause and have it
corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure
the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or
loose connections.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame,
fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At
the end of winter, the underbody should be
thoroughly flushed with plain water, being
careful to clean those areas where mud and
dirt may accumulate. For additional information, refer to the “Appearance and care” section of this manual.
The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance
schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there
is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Items marked with “*” are recommended by
INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. You
are not required to perform maintenance on
these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your INFINITI. Other
maintenance items and intervals are required.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
When applicable, additional information can
be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for wear,
fraying or cracking and for proper tension.
Replace any damaged drive belt.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your
vehicle requires that some items be checked
during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
NOTE:
INFINITI does not advocate the use of nonOEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on an INFINITI product.
Many of the aftermarket flushing systems
use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by INFINITI.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in
the “Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing
coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture for
your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of the
coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to
“Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve
noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*:
Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.
Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and
connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks,
deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace
any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust
pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks,
deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease.
Under severe driving conditions, inspect more
frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the
instructions under “Explanation of general
maintenance items” in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven
wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil and
transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of
leakage at specified intervals.
Replace at specified intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical
driving, INFINITI provides two maintenance
schedules that may be used, depending upon
the conditions in which you usually drive.
These schedules contain both distance and
time intervals, up to 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months. For most
people, the odometer reading will indicate
when service is needed. However, if you drive
very little, your vehicle should be serviced at
the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/
144 months, continue maintenance at the
same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE
ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving
for long distances, such as police, taxi or
door-to-door delivery use.
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions, varying
road surfaces, individual driving habits and
vehicle usage, additional or more frequent
maintenance may be required. After
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months,
continue maintenance at the same
mileage/time interval.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a
car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both standard and severe maintenance items should
be performed at every interval.
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on
vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance
items should be performed if you primarily
operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, D = Drain water
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belt
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
I*
I*
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
I*
I*
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
I*
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
I*
R
I*
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belt
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
I*
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
I*
I*
I*
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
I*
I*
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
I*
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the
factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such
maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY
MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines & cables
Brake pads & rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
CVT fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft (AWD models) & drive shaft boots夝
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter
Intelligent Key battery
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
I
I
15
(24)
18
I
I
20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I
I
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I
See NOTE (3)
I
I
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
R
R
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
CVT fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft (AWD models) & drive shaft
boots夝
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter
Intelligent Key battery
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
I
I
75
(120)
90
I
I
80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I
I
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136) (144) (152) (160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I
See NOTE (3)
I
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I
I
R
R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every
60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid
every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe
driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving
for long distance, such as police, taxi or
door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads & rotors
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Propeller shaft (AWD models) & drive shaft boots
Exhaust system
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a
car-top carrier.
Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE LOG
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or
126 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or
138 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or
144 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
MEMO
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . 10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . 10-11
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Flat towing for all–wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described
in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
Fuel
74 L
19-1/2 gal
16-1/4 gal
With oil filter
change
4.8 L
5-1/8 qt
4-1/4 qt
Without oil filter
change
4.5 L
4-3/4 qt
4 qt
9.6 L
2-1/2 gal
2-1/8 gal
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
—
—
—
Power Steering Fluid (PSF)
—
—
—
Differential gear oil
—
—
—
Transfer oil
—
—
—
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1 For additional information,
refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Engine coolant
(with reservoir)
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this
section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that
matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• INFINITI recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in INFINITI CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than
as recommended is not covered under the INFINITI’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.
• Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF may
prevent the power steering system from operating properly.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi-synthetic API
GL-5, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 or equivalent
• The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or
equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
Brake fluid
—
—
—
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
—
—
—
Air conditioning system oil
—
—
—
5L
1-3/8 gal
1-1/8 gal
Windshield-washer fluid
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use
unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT
3
*2: Available in mainland USA through an INFINITI retailer.
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or
other damage can occur if E-85 is used in
vehicles that are not designed to run on
E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more than
15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle
is not designed to run on a fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol can
adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage
caused by such fuel is not covered by the
INFINITI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
Technical and consumer information 10-3
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions.
Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more
details. Note that Federal and California
laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that
region.
Gasoline specifications
INFINITI recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) specifications where it is available.
Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance.
Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions.
INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air
and suggests that you use reformulated
gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and
methanol with or without advertising their
presence. INFINITI does not recommend the
use of fuels of which the oxygenate content
and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI
cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please
take the following precautions as the usage
of such fuels may cause vehicle performance
problems and/or fuel system damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should contain
no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl
alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also
contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors.
If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause
fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that
all methanol blends are suitable for use in
INFINITI vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or
a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to
run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps
to be identified with small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle.
U.S. government regulations require fuel
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by
a small, square, orange and black label with
the common abbreviation or the appropriate
percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive.
INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuel
containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely
affect vehicle performance, including the
emissions control system. Note that while
some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all
do, so you may have to consult your gasoline
retailer for more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended
for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that
can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which
may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms
are encountered, have your vehicle checked.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer.
However, now and then you may notice light
spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for
concern, because you get the greatest fuel
benefit when there is light spark knock for a
short time under heavy engine load.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock”
is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can
lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using
gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you
hear steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have an INFINITI retailer
correct the condition. Failure to correct the
condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which
INFINITI is not responsible.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on
the temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
LTI2051
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For
additional information, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in
this section. INFINITI recommends the use of
an energy conserving oil in order to improve
fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or
10-6 Technical and consumer information
International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification
and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have
the API certification mark on the front of the
container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they
could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
been previously used should not be used.
Your new INFINITI vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals”.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and
filters that are not of the specified quality, or
exceeding recommended oil and filter change
intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to
the engine caused by improper maintenance
or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or
viscosity is not covered by the INFINITI New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change
intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ towing a trailer
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information on maintenance
schedules, refer to the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement
of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
INFINITI vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery
and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. An
INFINITI retailer has the trained technicians
and equipment needed to recover and recycle
your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI
retailer when servicing your air conditioner
system.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your INFINITI
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, Genuine
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or the
exact equivalents.
Technical and consumer information 10-7
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
VQ35DD
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81)
cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)
1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
CVT in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
10-8 Technical and consumer information
No adjustment is necessary.
FXE22HR-11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type
Aluminum
Spare Wheel - Steel
Tire size
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Offset in (mm)
Size
1.97 (50)
18 x 7.5J
1.97 (50)
20 x 7.5J
18 x4T
235/65R18
235/55R20
Spare tire
T165/90D18
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
without roof rack
with roof rails
with roof rack/cross bars
Front and rear track
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
in (mm)
in (mm)
200.1 (5,083)
77.2 (1,960)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
lbs. (kg)
68.6 (1,743)
68.7 (1,746)
71.4 (1,813)
65.7 (1,670)
114.2 (2,900)
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.
M.V.S.S. certification label”
on the center pillar between the driver’s side
front and rear doors.
lbs. (kg)
lbs. (kg)
Technical and consumer information 10-9
WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your INFINITI vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your
vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline
vehicles must be operated with unleaded
gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle
to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may
differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another
country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation,
and registration are the responsibility of the
user. INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
TI1050M
LTI2028
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (chassis number)
The VIN plate is located as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
The vehicle identification number is located
as shown.
The VIN number is also available through the
center display screen. For additional information, refer to your “INFINITI InTouch™ Owner’s Manual”.
10-10 Technical and consumer information
LTI2255
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
WTI0172
WTI0198
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as:
(GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
Technical and consumer information 10-11
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2251
WTI0173
LTI2237
TIRE AND LOADING
INFORMATION LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER
SPECIFICATION LABEL
1. Find the centerline of the vehicle and
measure down 1.5 in (37.5 mm). Mark
the location on the fascia.
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.
A in the
2. Drill a 0.39 in (10 mm) hole 䊊
fascia.
10-12 Technical and consumer information
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
LTI2248
3. Hold the license plate bracket to the fasB.
cia and mark two locations 䊊
4. Remove the license plate bracket and
drill two 0.39 in (10 mm) holes in the
locations marked in the previous step.
LTI2249
C into the
5. Insert two screw grommets 䊊
fascia.
6. Install the license plate bracket to the
D.
fascia with two screws 䊊
WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in
a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly. This
weight does not include passengers and cargo.
Technical and consumer information 10-13
∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) curb weight plus the combined
weight of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
- maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
10-14 Technical and consumer information
∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo)
for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the load
limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on the
Tire and Loading Information label. Do
not exceed the number of occupants
shown as “Seating Capacity” on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the
following illustration.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
LTI0152
Example
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Technical and consumer information 10-15
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional information,
refer to “Tire and Loading Information
label” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
10-16 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in the
cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo
area. Your child could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the top tether
strap is damaged.
LIC3684
Cargo area luggage hooks
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The hooks can be used to
secure cargo with ropes or other types of
straps.
When securing items using luggage hooks
located on the side finisher do not apply a
load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single
hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.
(490 N) to a single hook.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR or the maximum front and
rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
TOWING A TRAILER
LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear axle
to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed
the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur, or
it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of
control and cause personal injury.
∙ Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the tire,
but can also cause unsafe vehicle
handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result
in a serious accident and personal
injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the vehicle is
loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and the rear wheels separately
to determine axle loads. Individual axle
loads should not exceed either of the
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The
total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). These ratings are given on
the vehicle certification label. If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove
items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer
and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle
handling, braking and performance and
may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive
train, steering, braking and other systems.
An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.InfinitiUSA.com.
This guide includes information on trailer
towing capability and the special equipment
required for proper towing.
Technical and consumer information 10-17
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
can affect engine performance and cause
overheating. The engine protection mode,
which helps reduce the chance of engine
damage, could activate and automatically
decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load,
weather and road conditions.
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the following Towing
Load/Specification Chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
∙ When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value
specified
in
the
following
Towing
Load/Specification Chart.
WARNING
LTI2030
The GCWR equals the combined weight of
the towing vehicle (including passengers and
cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing
loads greater than these or using improper
towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
not only related to the maximum trailer loads,
but also the places you plan to tow. Tow
weights appropriate for level highway driving
may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in
high outside temperatures on graded roads
10-18 Technical and consumer information
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If
the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving
speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe
area. Allow the engine to cool and return to
normal operation. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
INFINITI warranties.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment,
such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the
vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum
towing capacity and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
WTI0160
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer
manufacturer. The tongue load must be
within the maximum tongue load limits
shown
in
the
following
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow
for proper tongue load.
ATI1025
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle
Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load
and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on
the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly
found at truck stops, highway weigh stations,
building supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity
for tongue/king pin load, use the following
procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all
of the passengers and cargo that are
normally in the vehicle when towing a
trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GVWR. The remaining amount is the
available maximum tongue/king pin
load.
Technical and consumer information 10-19
To determine the available towing capacity,
use the following procedure.
Example:
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
"Towing
Load/Specification"
chart
found in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GCWR. The remaining amount is the
available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it
is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight
is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight
Rating shown on the trailer and is not more
than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross
Axle
Weight
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The
cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be
moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
10-20 Technical and consumer information
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg).
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label - 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg).
∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification" chart
- 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg).
∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
“Towing Load/Specification" chart 9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg).
7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg)
– 6,350 lbs.
(2,880 kg)
= 900 lbs. (409 kg)
15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg)
– 6,350 lbs.
(2,880 kg)
= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg)
900 lbs. (409 kg)
/ 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg)
=
GVWR
GVW
Available for tongue
weight
GCWR
GVW
Capacity available for
towing
Available tongue
weight
Available capacity
10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less
than the maximum towing capacity due to
the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within
the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange
the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load.
Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight
** Click HERE to see "Owner's Manual Supplement" **
specification shown in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than
15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are
within the required ratings.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
2WD grades:
AWD grades:
Maximum Towing Capacity*1
3,500 lbs.
5,000 lbs.
(1,588 kg)
(2,268 kg)
Maximum Tongue Load
350lbs.
500 lbs.
(158 kg)
(226 kg)
Maximum Gross Combined Weight 8,800 lbs.
10,000 lbs.
Rating
(3,991 kg)
(4,536 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to
achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this
manual are for general reference only. The
safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You
must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed
the published maximum towing capacity or
the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result
in an accident causing serious injury or
property damage.
Technical and consumer information 10-21
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow
package includes a receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
maximum towing capacity of this vehicle
when the proper towing equipment is used.
Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine INFINITI ball mounts and hitch balls are
available from an INFINITI retailer.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable
of towing a trailer heavier than the weight
rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing
capacity of your bumper hitch or receivertype frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper
hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A Genuine
INFINITI trailer hitch is available from an
INFINITI retailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is
securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid
personal injury or property damage due to
sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
10-22 Technical and consumer information
∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls
also have the size printed on the top of
the ball.
∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball based
on the trailer weight.
∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank
should be no more than 1/16” smaller
than the hole in the ball mount.
∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball must
be long enough to be properly secured to
the ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch
receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount
based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the
ball mount should be chosen to keep the
trailer tongue level with the ground.
Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
mount is one that is designed to carry the
whole amount of tongue weight and gross
weight directly on the ball mount and on the
receiver.
Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “loadleveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to
distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of
your trailer. Many vehicles can’t carry the full
tongue weight of a given trailer, and need
some of the tongue weight transferred
through the frame and pushing down on the
front wheels. This gives stability to the tow
vehicle.
2. Measure the height of a reference point
on the front and rear bumpers at the
center of the vehicle.
trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer for installing
and using the sway control device.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV)
is recommended if you plan to tow trailers
with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.
(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
equipment manufacturers to determine if
they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front
bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 –
13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should
be no higher than the reference height
measured in step 2.
Class I hitch
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If
you are considering use of a weightdistributing hitch system with a surge
brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge
brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
With the ignition on and the doors
closed, allow the vehicle to stand for
several minutes so that it can level.
WARNING
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg).
Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lbs.
(1,587 kg).
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher
than the measured reference height when
the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is
higher than the measured reference height
when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle
control and cause serious personal injury or
property damage.
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lbs.
(2,268 kg).
Sway control device
Tire pressures
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer
handling. Sway control devices may be used
to help control these affects. If you choose to
use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will
work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the
∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended
cold tire pressure indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
Technical and consumer information 10-23
∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the
trailer and tire manufacturer’s
specifications.
Trailer lights
Trailer brakes
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn
signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more than
15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a
reputable trailer retailer to obtain the
proper equipment and to have it installed.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains
should be crossed and should be attached to
the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle.
The safety chains can be attached to the
bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the
bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, contact an INFINITI
retailer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles
equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness
connector. If your trailer is equipped with a
flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be
needed to connect the trailer lights to the
vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts
stores and hitch retailers.
10-24 Technical and consumer information
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states
require a separate braking system on trailers
with a loaded weight above a specific
amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local
regulations and the regulations where you
plan to tow.
Several types of braking systems are available.
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge
brakes are activated by the trailer pushing
against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is
braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common
on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In
this type of system, there is no hydraulic or
electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal
sent from a trailer brake controller (special
brake-sensing module). For additional information, refer to “Electric trailer brake controller” in this section.
Have a professional supplier of towing
equipment make sure the trailer brakes are
properly installed and demonstrate proper
brake function testing.
To install the electric trailer brake controller
jumper harness, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to
the rearmost position.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.
LTI0117
Jumper Harness
Electric trailer brake controller
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may
require the installation of an aftermarket
trailer brake controller.
Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and
jumper harness that is specifically designed
to be used when installing an aftermarket
brake controller.
Technical and consumer information 10-25
Wire color designation for electric trailer
brake controller jumper harness.
WIRE COLOR
RED/GREEN
BLACK
BROWN/WHITE
RED/BLUE
RED
LTI2045
Connector Location
LTI2046
Connector
2. Locate the jumper harness connector
under the lower portion of the instrument panel. The connector is taped to
1 as indicated.
the wiring harness 䊊
∙ The connector is marked with a white tag
with “elec brake conn”.
NOTE
Vehicle stop lamp
switch to trailer brake
controller.
Brake controller ground
(-).
Trailer brake controller
switched output.
Not used
Fused trailer brake controller battery feed (B+).
3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper
harness to the connector.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer
brake controller according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Pre-towing tips
∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle
if it has an abnormal nose-up or nosedown condition; check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes of either condition.
10-26 Technical and consumer information
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of
gravity low.
∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60% of
the trailer load is in the front half and
40% is in the back half. Also make sure
the load is balanced side to side.
∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,
and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you
attach a trailer to the vehicle.
∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors conform
to all federal, state or local regulations. If
not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
∙ Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance
is known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of
the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice
turning, stopping and backing up in an area
which is free from traffic. Steering stability
and braking performance will be somewhat
different than under normal driving conditions.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the wheels
and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
slowly release the brake pedal until the
blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want
the trailer to go. Make small corrections
and back up slowly. If possible, have
someone guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
Technical and consumer information 10-27
7. Have someone retrieve and store the
blocks.
∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
∙ While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
maintain adequate control, reduce your
speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
long or repeated use of the brakes when
descending a hill, as this reduces their
effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the
need to brake as frequently.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises to
a high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of the turn than
your vehicle wheels. To compensate for
this, make a larger than normal turning
radius during the turn.
∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared
for possible changes in crosswinds that
could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s
first 500 miles (805 km).
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
do tow, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h).
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions
allow. This combination will help stabilize
the vehicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering
or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the
road in a safe area.
10-28 Technical and consumer information
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described in this section.
∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal
passing. Remember, the length of the
trailer must also pass the other vehicle
before you can safely change lanes.
∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower
gear for engine braking when driving
down steep or long hills. This will help
slow the vehicle without applying the
brakes.
∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
∙ Increase your following distance to allow
for greater stopping distances while
towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
∙ INFINITI recommends that the cruise
control not be used while towing a trailer.
∙ Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles
that are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break.
∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail
pipe or rear bumper.
∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer
lights before backing the trailer into the
water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently.
For additional information, refer to the “Doit-yourself” section of this manual.
FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT
WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so
equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when towing
a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such
as a motor home.
CAUTION
CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never flat tow your All-wheel drive
(AWD) vehicle.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle
with the front tires on the ground. Doing
so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow your All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicle with any wheels on the ground.
Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow your front wheel drive continuously variable transmission vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of
transmission lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by INFINITI” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Continuously Variable Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations
when using their product.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by INFINITI” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when towing
a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such
as a motor home.
Technical and consumer information 10-29
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform
to federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
WARNING
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Treadwear
Temperature A, B and C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
10-30 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat build-up and possible tire failure.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Your INFINITI is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with
your INFINITI. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ INFINITI Division
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For Canada
For USA
Emission Control System Warranty
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
INFINITI.
Details of these warranties may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with
your INFINITI. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
retailer, or INFINITI.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
Technical and consumer information 10-31
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
You may notify INFINITI by contacting
our Consumer Affairs Department,
toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.
or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/
fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
For Canada
Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from
Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or
online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English speakers) or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French
speakers).
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada
in addition to notifying INFINITI.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that INFINITI conduct a recall
campaign.
However,
Transport
Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
retailer, or INFINITI.
To notify INFINITI of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800361-4792.
You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/
fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
10-32 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) should never be tested using a two
wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make
sure you inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using
the wrong test equipment may result in
transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be
obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired
or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle
may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position without starting the engine. If the
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on
steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for
10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not
ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is
recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain collision or near collision-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial
collision situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and collision location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a collision investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer and INFINITI retailer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with
the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Technical and consumer information 10-33
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at INFINITI retailers. Genuine
INFINITI Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
INFINITI Service Manuals, contact:
www.infiniti-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine INFINITI
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest INFINITI retailer. For the phone number and location of an INFINITI retailer in
your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual
INFINITI representative will assist you.
10-34 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . .1-5, 1-8
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-13
Air bag warning light,
supplemental. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-13
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Air cleaner housing filter. . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . .4-35
Air conditioner specification label . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-35
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . .4-43
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . .2-32
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . .2-9
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-135
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . .3-39, 3-41
Automatic power window switch . . .2-66
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-36
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-39, 3-41
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Brake wear indicators . . . . . .2-15, 8-19
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . .2-8
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
B
Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) . . . .5-59
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144, 8-12
Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
INFINITI Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . .8-22
Key fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-17
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) system . . .5-47
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . .5-38
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . .5-135
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-25
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Child restraints . . . . .1-26, 1-26, 1-28, 1-30
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . .1-29, 1-36, 1-42, 1-47
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-33
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . .2-46
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-11
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Controls
Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-35
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . .8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76, 5-77
Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . . .2-44
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . .2-45
Distance Control Assist (DCA) system . . .5-98
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5
11-2
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . .3-39, 3-41
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . .5-144
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Dual panel moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68
Dual power moonroof . . . . . . . .2-68, 2-68
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . .2-6
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . .5-4
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
F
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-16, 6-3
Emission control information label . . . .10-11
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-31
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-17
Block heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-5
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine compartment check locations . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Floor mat positioning aid. . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system . . . .2-10, 5-109
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . .1-57
Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . .5-140
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-28
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-129
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . .2-74, 2-75, 2-76,
2-77, 2-77, 2-78
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
H
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-40
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Heated rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Heater
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-35
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Heater and air conditioner (automatic). . .4-34
Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . .5-139
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . .2-74, 2-75, 2-76,
2-77, 2-77, 2-78
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Hook
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
INFINITI Drive Mode Selector. . . . . . . .5-24
INFINITI Intelligent Key System. . . . .3-2, 3-7
Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 3-4, 5-17
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-36
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-45
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . .2-45
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-78
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation . . . . .3-14
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
J
I
Ignition switch
Push-button ignition switch . . .
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .
Important vehicle information label .
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . .
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . .
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .5-13
. .5-17
.10-11
. .8-16
.5-130
K
Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-22
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-14
11-3
L
Label
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . .10-11
Emission control information label . .10-11
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-68
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
License plate
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-12
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Light
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . .1-68, 2-13
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-25
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-8
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-25
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-40
11-4
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-40
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-10
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-60
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-10
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Luggage rack (see roof rack). . . . . . . . .2-63
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-41
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . . .2-45
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-36
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-28
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) .
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . .
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .10-5
. . .2-5
.
.
.
.
.
.10-2
. .8-7
. .8-8
. .8-6
. .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . .
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . .
Owner's manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .10-6
. .10-6
. .3-37
. .6-13
.10-34
.10-34
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . .1-29, 1-36, 1-42, 1-47
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-17
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Predictive Forward Collision Warning
(PFCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
P
R
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-134
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54, 2-55
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-134
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Power inverter switch. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54, 2-55
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . .1-29, 1-36, 1-42, 1-47
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA). . . . . . .5-68
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . .2-31, 2-32, 2-52
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7
Registering a vehicle in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . .3-20, 5-18
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-31
Roadside assistance program . . . . . . . . .6-2
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts. . . .1-29, 1-36, 1-42, 1-47
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-31
Seat adjustment
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-3
Second row bench seats . . . . . . .1-5, 1-8
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-17
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17, 7-6
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-21
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-20, 2-12
Seats
2nd row bench seat adjustment. . .1-5, 1-8
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-39, 3-41
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Seats/floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5, 7-6
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
11-5
Security system
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 3-4, 5-17
Security systems
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . .10-34
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Spark plug replacement. . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68
Stability control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-17
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-14
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Steering
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-134
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
11-6
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . .1-68
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-13
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . .1-68
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . .1-50
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Automatic power window switch. . . .2-66
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-40
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-40
Instrument brightness control . . . . . .2-45
Power door lock switch . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Power inverter switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . .2-6
Theft
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 3-4, 5-17
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-39
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28, 8-28
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-30
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-5
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-33
Towing
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-21
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-74, 2-75, 2-76,
2-77, 2-77, 2-78
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-30
USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-43
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .10-9
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-136
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16, 6-17
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 3-4, 5-17
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
W
Warning
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . .1-68, 2-13
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . .2-9
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-10
Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Distance Control Assist (DCA). . . . . .5-98
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2
Lane Departure
Prevention . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
Lane Departure Warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27, 5-32, 5-35
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low fuel warning light . . . . . .2-12, 2-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-10
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-60
Seat belt warning light . . . . . .1-20, 2-12
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-13
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-68
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Audible reminders . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9, 2-13
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Warning systems switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Locking passengers' windows . . . . . .2-65
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-35
11-7
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use
unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or
other damage can occur if E-85 is used in
vehicles that are not designed to run on
E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more than
15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle
is not designed to run on a fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol can
adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage
caused by such fuel is not covered by the
INFINITI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions.
Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more
details. Note that Federal and California
laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that
region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in
the “Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
ENGINE OIL
RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or
shortened engine life.
Printing : August 2017
Publication No.: OM18EA 0L50U0
Printed in the U.S.A.
L50-D
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement